Owner’s Manual Owner’s and Maintenance Safety Operation, ASTRA

ASTRA TS 1612-B-06 ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. Ltd., ©Copyright Motors Vauxhall by or Reproduction or in whole translation, in parts, is not withoutpermitted prior consent written Motors Vauxhall from Ltd. under rights as understood All the copyright explicitly are laws Ltd. Motors Vauxhall reserved by and specifications contained in this illustrations information, All based on the latest are manual information production atavailable the time of publication. The right changes at make is reserved to time without any notice. JanuaryEdition: 2006. VAUXHALL Astra

Owner’s Manual Seite -2, , Bearbeitung 19.12.05 Data specific to your vehicle Please enter your vehicle’s data here to keep it easily accessible. This information is available under the section "Technical data" as well as on the identification plate. Fuel Designation

Engine oil Grade

Viscosity

Tyre inflation pressure Tyre size with up to 3 persons with full load Summer tyres front rear front rear

Winter tyres front rear front rear

Weights Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight

– EC kerbweight

=Loading Seite -1, , Bearbeitung 19.12.05 Your Astra Developed according to the latest findings of vehicle research, it offers technical sophistication and exceptional comfort. Your Astra represents an intelligent synthesis of advanced technology, outstanding safety, environmental compatibility and economy. It now lies with you to drive your Astra safely and to see it performs perfectly. This Owner’s Manual provides you with all the necessary information to that end. Make sure your passengers are aware of the possible risk of accident and injury which may result from improper use of the vehicle. The Owner’s Manual should always be kept in the vehicle: ready to hand in the glove compartment. Make use of the Owner’s Manual: z Its "In brief" section will give you an initial overview. z The table of contents at the beginning of the owner’s manual and within the individual chapters will show you where everything is. z Its index will help you find what you want. z It will familiarise you with the sophisticated technology. z It will increase your pleasure in your vehicle. z It will help you to handle your vehicle expertly. The Owner’s Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood. This symbol signifies: 6 Continue reading on next page. 3 The asterisk signifies: equipment not fitted to all vehicles (model variants, engine options, models specific to one country, optional equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories). 9 Warning

Text marked 9 Warning provides information on risk of accident or injury. Disregard of the instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Inform your passengers accordingly.

Yellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or indicate some action to be performed. Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second action to be performed. We wish you many hours of pleasurable driving Your Vauxhall Team Seite 0, , Bearbeitung 20.12.05 Commitment to customer In brief ...... 2 Contents satisfaction: Instruments ...... 36 Our aim: to keep you happy with your Keys, doors, bonnet ...... 66 vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers Seats, Interior ...... 87 offer first class service at competitive Safety systems ...... 109 prices. Experienced, factory-trained Lighting ...... 134 technicians work according to factory Windows, sunroof ...... 141 instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can TwinTop ...... 146 supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALL- APPROVED PARTS, which have undergone Climate control ...... 153 stringent quality and precision checks, and Easytronic ...... 174 of course useful and attractive Automatic transmission ...... 182 VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES. Automatic transmission Our name is your guarantee! with ActiveSelect ...... 188 For details of the Driving hints ...... 196 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer Network Saving fuel, please ring this number; 01582 - 427200 protecting the environment ...... 198 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling ...... 200 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases .... 203 Drive control systems ...... 208 Brakes ...... 222 Wheels, tyres ...... 226 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing ...... 234 Self-help ...... 243 If you have a problem ...... 288 Maintenance, inspection system ...... 290 Vehicle care ...... 302 Technical data ...... 306 Index ...... 342 2 In brief In brief

Picture no: 17027t.tif Picture no: 16968t.tif Key numbers, To unlock and open the vehicle: code numbers Press button q, Remove key number from keys. pull door handle The key number is specified in the vehicle In vehicles with an Open&Start system 3, documents and in the Car Pass. the vehicle is unlocked automatically by pulling a door handle or by operating the Alloy wheels 3, towing equipment 3: make button beneath the tailgate handle, if the a note of the key identifier codes. electronic key is in the external reception Electronic immobiliser, Infotainment range of the vehicle. system 3: the code numbers are specified 6 Door locks, child safety locks – in the Car Pass. see page 86, Do not keep the Car Pass in the vehicle. electronic immobiliser – see page 67, keys – see page 66, 3 For key with retractable key blade , Open&Start system 3 – see page 70, press button to extend. radio frequency remote control – 6 Further information – see pages 66, 67, see page 68, vehicle recommissioning – see page 301. central locking system – see page 76, anti-theft locking system – see page 76, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 83, TwinTop roof operation 3 – see page 146. In brief 3

Picture no: 16969t.tif Picture no: 16970t.tif Picture no: 16971t.tif To unlock and To adjust front seat: To adjust front seat backrest: open the luggage compartment: Pull handle, Turn handwheel Press button q on slide seat, Move backrest to suit seating position. remote control and release handle Do not lean on seat backrest whilst operate button beneath handle Never adjust the front seat while driving. It adjusting it. In vehicles with Open&Start system 3 the could move in an uncontrolled manner 6 Seating position – see page 87. tailgate is unlocked automatically by when the handle is pulled. operating the button beneath the handle if 6 Seating position – see page 87. the electronic key is within the external reception range of the vehicle. The doors 9 Warning are also unlocked. 6 Open&Start-System 3 – see page 70, Important: Do not sit nearer than radio frequency remote control – 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering see page 68, wheel, to permit safe airbag deployment. central locking system – see page 76, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – see page 83. 4 In brief

Picture no: 16972t.tif Picture no: 16973t.tif Picture no: 16974t.tif To adjust front seat lumbar To adjust front seat height 3: To adjust front seat inclination 3: support 3: Operate lever on outboard side Pull inner lever on front of seat, Turn handwheel of seat adjust inclination, Adjust lumbar support to suit personal Lever pumping action release lever, requirements. upward: seat higher engage seat in position Do not lean on seat backrest whilst downward: seat lower Adjust the inclination by distributing body adjusting it. 6 Seating position – see page 87. weight. 6 Seating position – see page 87. 6 Seating position – see page 87. In brief 5

Picture no: 16975t.tif Picture no: 17959t.tif Picture no: 16976t.tif To fold the front seat backrest To adjust thigh support 3 To adjust head restraint height of forward 3: of the front sport seat 3: front and rear outboard seats: Lift release lever, Press button in recessed handle Press button to release, fold backrest forward and lock, centred in the lower half of the adjust height, slide seat forward adjustment cushion and engage in position To raise seat, slide back to stop, lift release adjust the thigh support 6 Adjusting centre rear head restraint – lever and raise backrest. Adjust thigh support to suit personal see page 88, In front seats with memory-function 3, the requirements. head restraint position – see page 88, seat engages in its original position when head restraint removal – see page 88. pushed back. In front seats without memory function 3, engage seat in required position when pushing backwards. Panoramic windscreen 3: before folding the seat, push the head restraints down and close the sunvisors. 6 Seating position – see page 87. 6 In brief

Picture no: 16977t.tif Picture no: 16978t.tif Picture no: 18021T.tif Adjusting interior mirror: To adjust exterior mirrors: Electrical exterior mirrors 3, Swivel mirror housing From inside, swivel lever in adjust: Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing required direction Four-way switch in driver’s door to reduce dazzle at night. 6 Further information, aspherical exterior Press mirror switch right or left: four-way 6 Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror – mirror 3 – see page 132. switch adjusts corresponding mirror. see page 132. 6 Further information, aspherical exterior mirror – see page 132, heated exterior mirrors – see page 18. In brief 7

Picture no: 16980t.tif Picture no: 16981t.tif Picture no: 17328t.tif Swing-in exterior mirror: Fitting seat belt: Steering wheel adjustment: Manually: press lightly. Draw seat belt smoothly from Move lever down, Electrically 3: press n and both mirrors will inertia reel, adjust height and distance, swing in. guide over shoulder move lever up, and engage in buckle engage Press button n again - both exterior mirrors swivel to the driving position. The belt must not be twisted at any point. Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is The lap belt must lie snugly against the stationary and steering column lock is If an electrical retracted mirror is extended body. The backrest must not be tilted back released. manually, pressing button n will cause the too far (recommended maximum tilting 6 Airbag systems – see page 115. mirror to move all the way forward. The angle approx. 25°). other mirror will be electrically swivelled to the driving position. If button n is pressed To release belt, press red button on belt again, both mirrors will be electrically buckle. retracted. Press again: both mirrors swivel 6 Seat belt – see page 110, to the driving position. airbag systems – see page 115, seating position – see page 87. 8 In brief In brief 99

Page Page Page 1 Side air vents ...... 155 8 Instruments ...... 36 13 Starter switch with 2 Front passenger’s airbag ...... 116 9 Horn ...... 16 electronic immobiliser ...... 14 and 3 Centre air vents ...... 155 10 Windscreen wiper, sensor panel for emergency 4 Central Information Display for windscreen wash system, operation Open&Start system 3 ... 73 headlight wash system 3 and time, date, outside temperature, 14 Accelerator pedal...... 196, 197 Infotainment system 3, rear window wash system ...... 17, 18 check control 3 ...... 62 11 Parking lights, dipped beam ...... 134 15 Brake pedal ...... 197, 222, 223 Trip computer 3 ...... 52, 58 Instrument illumination ...... 138 16 Clutch pedal 3...... 197 3 Electronic Climate Control ...... 167 Fog tail light ...... 135 17 Steering wheel adjustment ...... 7 3 5 Heated seat (left) 3 ...... 156 Front fog lights ...... 135 3 18 Start / Stop button 3 ...... 22, 70 Deflation Detection System 3 ...... 217 Headlight range adjustment .... 136 Tyre pressure monitoring 12 Bonnet release lever ...... 86 19 Ashtray 3 ...... 106 system 3 ...... 218 Cigarette lighter 3 ...... 105 Parking distance sensors 3 ...... 214 20 Climate control ...... 153 Hazard warning lights ...... 16 Central locking system ...... 78 21 Infotainment system 3...... 65 SPORT mode 3 ...... 210 22 Glove compartment ...... 72, 108, 155 Heated seat (right) 3 ...... 156 6 Turn signal lights, headlight flash dipped beam, main beam ...... 15 Door-to-door lighting function ...... 138 Parking lights 3 ...... 138 Cruise control 3 ...... 13, 212 7 Remote control 3 for Infotainment system ...... 64 10 In brief

Door open, Control indicators Q S Engine oil level 3, see page 38. 0 Open&Start system 3, see pages 39, 292. see pages 36, 70. p Alternator, 8 Exterior lights, see page 39. I Engine oil pressure, see pages 39, 134. see page 37. W Coolant temperature, r Parking distance sensors 3, see pages 39, 294. R Brake system, see page 214. clutch system, A Engine electronics, O Turn signal lights, see pages 38, 222, 296. Transmission electronics 3, see pages 15, 40. Electronic immobiliser, v Airbag systems, 3 Diesel fuel filter , Y Fuel level, belt tensioners, Fault, 3 see pages 40, 45, 201. deployable anti-roll bar , see pages 39, 67, 180, 186, see pages 112, 121, 130. 194, 206. > Front fog lights 3, see pages 40, 135. v Electronic IDS+ Interactive Driving System 3, Stability Programme Continuous Damping Control 3, (ESP®Plus) 3, C Main beam, SPORT mode 3, see pages 15, 40. see page 208. see pages 210, 211. X Seat belt 3, r Fog tail light, see pages 38, 113. see pages 40, 135. In brief 11

T Winter programme of u Anti-lock Brake System, Lighting automatic transmission 3 see page 225. Light switch, or Easytronic 3, switch positions, see pages 177, 185, 192. ! Preheating system 3, see pages 14, 134, 3 Diesel particle filter , 7 Lights off, 1 SPORT mode of see page 42. automatic transmission 3 8 Parking lights, or Easytronic 3, w Deflation 9 Dipped beam, main beam. see pages 176, 184, 191. Detection System (DDS) 3, tyre pressure monitoring > Front fog lights 3, y Seat occupancy recognition 3, system 3, see page 135. see page 122. see pages 42, 217, 220. r Fog tail light, Z Exhaust emission 3, B Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 see page 135. see pages 41, 205. (AFL), Fault, see pages 137, 140. C Main beam, see page 15. m Cruise control 3, see pages 13, 212. O Turn signal lights, see page 15.

k Instrument illumination, see page 138.

c Courtesy light, see page 139.

a Reading lights 3, see page 139.

¨ Hazard warning lights, see page 16. 12 In brief

Climate control n Air conditioning system 3, Sunroof 3 Air distribution, see pages 19, 160, 164. ü Sunroof, see pages 157, 171, opening or tilting – see page 145. 3 L to head area via adjustable 4 Air recirculation system , d Sunroof, air vents and to footwell, see pages 160, 164, 172. closing – see page 145. M to head area via AUTO Automatic mode 3, adjustable air vents, see pages 19, 168. G Sunblind, opening – see page 145. l to windscreen, V Demisting and defrosting 3, Sunblind, J to windscreen and see pages 19, 159, 162, 170. H closing – see page 145. to footwell, ß Heated front seats 3, K to footwell. see page 156. Windscreen wiper x Stalk positions, Airflow, Astra TwinTop 3 see pages 17, 18, see pages 157, 171. > Open roof, § Off, see page 147. A Automatic control $ Timed interval wipe, or of fan speed 3, < Close roof, automatic wipe see page 164. see page 147. with rain sensor 3, Ü Heated rear window, % Slow, " Central switch see pages 18, 156. window operation, & Fast. opening, see page 142.

" Central switch window operation, closing, see page 142. In brief 13

Cruise control 3 Miscellaneous E Deflation Detection System 3, Buttons on turn signal stalk, p Central locking system, tyre pressure monitoring see pages 16, 212. locking, see page 76. system 3, see pages 217, 218. m Activate, store, q Central locking system, accelerate, unlocking, see page 78. r Parking distance sensors 3, g resume see page 214. stored speed, m Central locking switch, 3 decelerate, see page 78. SPORT SPORT mode , § see page 210. deactivate. b Vauxhall alarm system 3, see page 83. T Winter programme, Information display, Easytronic 3, Infotainment system 0 Emergency operation automatic transmission 3, Information display, Open&Start system, see pages 177, 185, 192. see page 46. see page 73. j Horn, Ö On button for date and time: z Child safety system see page 16. see page 48. for rear windows 3, ; Setting buttons for date and time: see page 142. + First-aid kit (cushion) 3, see page 48. see page 248.

Remote control for ¨ Warning triangle 3, Infotainment system 3, see page 248. see pages 49, 64. 14 In brief

Picture no: 16982t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif Picture no: 16986t.tif Steering column lock and ignition: Steering column lock and ignition Light switch: Turn key to position 1; on vehicles with Open&Start 7 = Off release steering column lock by system 3: 8 = Parking lights moving the steering wheel slightly Make sure electronic key is 9 = Dipped or main beam Positions: inside the car and press AUTO = Daytime running lights 3 0 = Ignition off the Start / Stop button; Press > = Front fog lights 3 1 = Steering released, ignition off release steering column lock by Press r = Fog tail light 2 = Ignition on, moving the steering wheel slightly 6 Further information – see page 134, with diesel engine: preheating To start the vehicle, also operate brake or headlight warning device – see page 23. 3=Start clutch pedal. To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition off, remove key and engage steering off by pressing the Start / Stop button, wheel. open driver’s door and engage steering 6 Starting – see page 22, wheel. Do not allow vehicle to move whilst electronic immobiliser – see page 67, doing this. parking the vehicle – see page 24. 6 Starting – see page 22, electronic immobiliser – see page 67, parking the vehicle – see page 24. In brief 15

Picture no: 16987t.tif Picture no: 16988t.tif Picture no: 16989t.tif Dipped and main beam switch: Headlight flash: To operate turn signal lights: Main beam = Push stalk Pull stalk towards steering wheel Right = Move stalk up forward Left = Move stalk down Dipped beam = Push stalk After operation, the turn signal stalk forward again returns to its starting position. or pull toward If the stalk is moved past the resistance steering wheel point, the turn signal light remains on. The blue control indicator C is illuminated When the steering wheel moves back when main beam is on. toward the straight-ahead position, the turn signal light is automatically deactivated. Tap signal: move stalk to resistance point and release to activate three flashes from the turn signals when changing lanes or the like. Move the stalk to the resistance point and hold for the turn signals to flash longer. Switch the turn signal off manually by moving the stalk slightly. 16 In brief

Picture no: 16990t.tif Picture no: 16991t.tif Picture no: 16992t.tif Cruise control operation 3: Hazard warning lights: Activate horn: Press button on stalk On = Press ¨ Press j in centre of steering Switch on: briefly press button m. Off = Press ¨ again wheel Switch off: briefly press button §. To aid location of the pushbutton, the red 6 Airbag systems – see page 115, surface is illuminated when the ignition is Steering wheel mounted remote control Resume at stored speed: briefly press switched on. When the button is pressed, buttons for Infotainment system 3 – button g. its control indicator flashes in time with the see page 64. 6 Cruise control 3 – see page 212. hazard warning lights. In brief 17

Picture no: 16993t.tif Picture no: 16994t.tif Picture no: 16995t.tif Windscreen wiper: Windscreen wiper: Automatic wiping with rain Move stalk upward Adjustable timed interval wiper sensor 3: § = Off To set the wiper interval to a value between Move stalk upward $ = Adjustable timed 2 and 15 seconds: $ = Automatic wiping with interval wipe Switch on ignition. rain sensor % = Slow Press stalk down from position §. Automatic wiping $: the rain sensor & = Fast Wait the desired interval. detects the amount of water on the Set the stalk to timed interval wipe $. Stalk always moves back to starting windscreen and automatically regulates position. Shift to next higher or lower level: The interval remains stored until the next the windscreen wiper. move stalk slightly. change or the ignition is switched off. To switch off, move stalk downwards. Switching the ignition on and moving the Push stalk past resistance point and hold: stalk to $ sets the interval to 4 seconds. 6 Further information – the windscreen wiper stages are run see pages 297, 304. through; an acoustic signal sounds at position §. Press stalk down from position §: single swipe. 6 Further information – see pages 297, 304. 18 In brief

Picture no: 16996t.tif Picture no: 16997t.tif Picture no: 16998t.tif Operating windscreen and To operate rear window wiper 3 Heated rear window, headlight wash systems 3: and wash system 3: heated exterior mirrors: Pull stalk towards steering wheel Wiper on = Push stalk On = Press Ü The wiper swipes for a few strokes. At low forward Off = Press Ü again speeds, there is a single post-wash swipe. Wiper off = Push stalk Heating operational only with engine The headlight wash system 3 can be forward again running. operated when the lights are on. Wash Wash = Press and hold The rear window and exterior mirror fluid is sprayed on the headlights. The The rear window wiper swipes in timed heating is switched off automatically headlight wash system cannot be interval mode. after approx. 15 minutes. operated for 2 minutes thereafter. The rear window wiper engages 6 Further information – see page 156. On vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, automatically when the windscreen wiper keep the sensor area clean by operating is switched on and reverse gear is the wash system regularly. engaged. 6 Further information – 6 Further information – see pages 297, 304. see pages 297, 304. In brief 19

Range 257 miles

Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal

19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36

Picture no: 16999t.tif Picture no: 17000t.tif Picture no: 17329t.tif To demist or defrost windows: To set automatic mode of Information display 3: Set air distribution to l, Electronic Climate Control Provides information: rotary knob for temperature and (ECC) 3: –time, airflow clockwise; Press AUTO button, – outside temperature, Air conditioning system 3: set temperature using rotary –radio3 and date, Also press button n; knob – navigation 3, 3 Automatic air conditioning Open all air vents. – telephone , 3 system 3: – check control , 6 Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 – –trip computer3, n v Press button and , see page 167. – Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3. turn rotary knob for temperature clockwise, 6 Information Display 3 – see page 46. airflow to A; Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3: Press button V Open air vents and direct the side air vents toward the door windows. 6 Climate control – see page 153. 20 In brief

Picture no: 17001t.tif Picture no: 17002t.tif Picture no: 17003t.tif Manual transmission: Easytronic 3: Automatic transmission 3: Reverse: with the vehicle stationary, wait N = Neutral (idle) P = Park 3 seconds after declutching and then pull o =Drive position R = Reverse up the button on the selector lever and + =Higher gear N = Neutral (idle) engage the gear. - = Lower gear D = Automatic gear selection If the gear does not engage, set the lever A = Change between 3 = 1st to 3rd gear in neutral, release the clutch pedal and automatic and 2 = 1st and 2nd gear depress again; then repeat gear selection. manual mode 1 = 1st gear R = Reverse Starting only possible in P or N. To move (with selector lever lock) from P, switch on ignition, depress foot The selector lever must always be moved brake and press button on selector lever. in the appropriate direction as far as it will Press button on selector lever to engage P go. Upon release, it automatically returns or R. to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear / mode indicator in the transmission P: Only with vehicle stationary, first display. apply handbrake R: Only with vehicle stationary The foot brake must be depressed when 6 starting. Automatic transmission – see page 182. 6 Easytronic – see page 174. In brief 21

To select P or R, press button on selector lever. P: Only with vehicle stationary, first apply handbrake R: Only with vehicle stationary 6 Automatic transmission with 3 – see page 188.

Picture no: 17330t.tif Picture no: 17004t.tif Automatic transmission with Exhaust gases are poisonous ActiveSelect 3: Exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, P = Park which is extremely poisonous but is R = Reverse gear odourless and colourless. N = Neutral (idle) Therefore never inhale exhaust gases, and D = Automatic gear selection never run the engine in an enclosed space. Selector lever in D to left: Avoid driving with an open luggage Manual mode compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases + = Higher gear or stage could penetrate the interior. - = Lower gear or stage P or N must be engaged when starting. To move from P or N, switch on ignition, depress foot brake and press button on selector lever. 22 In brief

Before starting-off, check: z Tyre pressure and tyre condition – see pages 228, 326. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine compartment – see pages 291 to 299. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and number plates are free from dirt, snow and ice and are operational. z No objects are placed in front of the rear window, on the instrument panel or in the area in which the airbags inflate. z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are correctly adjusted. Picture no: 17005t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif To start engine: To start engine with Open&Start z Brake operation. Operate clutch and brake, system 3: automatic transmission 3 The electronic key must be inside in P or N, the vehicle, Easytronic 3: depress brake, operate clutch or brake, do not accelerate, automatic transmission 3 petrol engines: in P or N, Turn key to position 3; Easytronic 3: depress brake, diesel engine: do not accelerate, Turn key to position 2, petrol engine: Press button; when control indicator ! goes diesel engine: Briefly press out1) turn key to position 3; button, when control indicator ! release key once engine is goes out1) press button again for running 1second; Before restarting or switching off the release button once engine is engine, turn key back to 0. running To switch on the ignition, only turn the Press button again to repeat the starting key to 2. procedure or switch off the engine. 6 Further information – see pages 67, 243. 1) Preheating system switches on only if outside temperature is low. In brief 23

Only press briefly to switch in the ignition if Warning buzzers the brake or clutch pedal has not been When starting the engine or whilst driving: depressed. z if the electronic key of the Open&Start Do not start unless vehicle is stationary. system is not present or is not recognised 3, 6 Further information – see pages 67, 243. z if a door or the tailgate is ajar, z once you have reached a certain speed if the handbrake is applied 3, z if a specified maximum speed is exceeded 3, z for Easytronic 3 – if A, M or R is selected while the engine is running and the Picture no: 17006t.tif driver’s door is opened but the foot Releasing the handbrake: brake is not depressed. Raise lever slightly, When the vehicle is parked and the driver’s press lock button, door is opened: lower lever fully z when the key is in the starter switch, To reduce operating forces, depress foot z brake at the same time. with parking lights or dipped beam on, z 3 Drive carefully, economically and with the with Open&Start system and environment in mind. While driving, do not automatic transmission if the selector do anything that could distract you. lever is not in P, z 3 6 Brakes - see page 222. with Easytronic – if the handbrake is not applied and no gear is engaged when the engine is off. 24 In brief

Indicator and warning buzzers for z Continuous warning buzzer during roof Astra TwinTop 3: operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have z Indicator buzzer upon completed been triggered. opening or closing of the convertible z Continuous warning buzzer starting one hardtop. minute before the end of the 9-minute z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising standby time with the roof in an or lowering of the electric luggage intermediate position. compartment loading aid. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed minute before the end of the 9-minute during roof operation. standby time with the loading aid in a z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully raised position. opening during operation of the luggage compartment loading aid. Picture no: 17007t.tif z Gong tone during roof operation if Parking the vehicle: vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph Apply handbrake firmly, (30 km/h). turn engine off, z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds turn ignition off, 20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully lock steering wheel, open or closed. lock vehicle z Three gong tones during roof or loading To lock, press p button or with Open&Start aid operation if the luggage system 3 touch sensor in one of the front compartment blind is not attached. door handles. z Three gong tones during roof operation With Open&Start system 3, the driver’s if outside temperature is below –20 °C, door must be opened to lock the steering vehicle battery voltage is too low or the wheel. system is overloaded. In brief 25

To activate the anti-theft locking system Advice when parking: z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 control and the Vauxhall alarm system 3 press z Do not park the vehicle on an easy indicator R flashes for a few seconds button p twice or with Open&Start flammable surface. The high after the ignition is switched off if the system 3 touch sensor in one of the front temperature of the exhaust system handbrake has not been applied – door handles twice. could ignite the surface. see page 179. 6 Further information – see pages 67, 196, z Always apply the handbrake firmly. z With the Open&Start system 3 the Open&Start system – see page 70, Apply the handbrake as firmly as engine can only be switched off when radio frequency remote control – see possible on uphill or downhill slopes. To the vehicle is stationary. page 68, reduce operating forces, depress foot z Remove key. With Open&Start system 3, central locking system – see page 76, brake at the same time. switch off ignition and open driver’s 3 Vauxhall alarm system – see page 83, door. vehicle decommissioning – see page 301, z Close the windows and sunroof 3 or TwinTop roof operation 3 – see page 146. TwinTop. z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to z Before switching off ignition: with engage (anti-theft protection). manual transmission, engage first or z The engine cooling fans may run after reverse gear; with automatic the engine has been switched off – see transmission 3, selector lever in P; with page 291. Easytronic 3 engage first or reverse gear 6 Further information – (note gear indicator – see page 174). see pages 300, 301. z For automatic transmission 3 the key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. With the Open&Start system 3 "P" flashes in the transmission display for several seconds if P has not been selected or the handbrake has not been applied. 26 In brief

Genuine Vauxhall Parts and "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" Accessories and conversion parts approved by We recommend that you use "Genuine Vauxhall can be obtained from your Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can conversion parts expressly approved for provide comprehensive advice about your vehicle type. These parts have permissible technical changes and ensure undergone special tests to establish their that the part is installed correctly. reliability, safety and specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous 9 Warning market monitoring, we cannot assess or Carry out regularly the checks guarantee these attributes for other recommended in the individual sections products, even if they have been granted of this Owner’s Manual. approval by the relevant authorities or in Picture no: 17008t.tif some other form. Ensure that your vehicle is serviced at the Service work, service intervals specified in the Service maintenance Booklet. We recommend that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall Authorised We recommend that you entrust all work to Repairer. your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can provide you with reliable service and Have faults remedied without delay! correctly perform all work according to Consult a workshop. We recommend factory instructions. your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. If necessary, interrupt your journey. 6 If you have a problem – see page 288, service interval display – 6 Maintenance – see page 290. see pages 44, 290. In brief 27

That was the most important information for your first drive in your Astra.

The other pages of this chapter contain a summary of the interesting functions in your vehicle.

The remaining chapters of the Owner’s Manual contain important information on operation, safety and maintenance as well as a complete index. 28 In brief

Picture no: 17009t.tif Picture no: 17010t.tif Picture no: 17011t.tif Vauxhall Full-size airbag system Side airbag system Active head restraints 3 The Vauxhall Full-size airbag system The side airbag system triggers when a at front seats comprises several individual systems. side-on collision occurs and provides a In the event of a rear-end impact, the safety barrier for the driver and/or Front airbag system active head restraints automatically tilt passenger in the respective front door forwards. The head is more effectively The front airbag system will be triggered in area. This reduces the risk of injury to the the event of a serious accident involving a supported by the head restraint and the upper body considerably in case of a side- risk of injuries caused by whiplash in the frontal impact and forms safety cushions impact. for the driver and front passenger. The neck area is reduced. 3 forward movement of the driver and front Curtain airbag system Active head restraints are identified by the passenger is checked and the risk of The curtain airbag system triggers in case lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint injuries to the upper body and head of a side-on collision and provides a safety guide sleeves. thereby substantially reduced. barrier in the head area on the respective side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a side-on collision. 6 Further information – see page 115. In brief 29

Picture no: 17012t.tif Picture no: 17013t.tif Picture no: 17014t.tif Operating menus in Selection using multi-function button: Selection using left-hand adjuster wheel on the information display 3 rotate and press multi-function button. steering wheel: rotate and press adjuster Menu options are selected using menus To exit a menu, turn the multi-function wheel. and using the buttons or the four-way button left or right to Return or Main and button or the multi-function button on the select. Infotainment system 3 or the left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. The respective menu options are shown on the display. Selection using four-way button: press four-way button at top, bottom, left or right. 30 In brief

FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3

ᕃ 90.6 MHz Coolant level check

19,5° 19:36 OK

Picture no: 17331t.tif Picture no: 17339t.tif Picture no: 17015t.tif Trip computer 3 Check control 3 Remote control for The trip computers provide information on The check control software monitors Infotainment system 3 driving data, which is continually recorded z Fluid levels The functions of the Infotainment system 3 and evaluated electronically. and the information display can be z Tyre pressure 3 Functions: operated with the buttons on the steering z Range z Radio frequency remote control battery wheel. z Instantaneous consumption z Vauxhall alarm system 3 Further information is available in the z Distance travelled Infotainment system operating z z Average speed Important exterior lights, including instructions. z Effective consumption cables and fuses z Average consumption z Stop watch z Tyre pressure 3 In brief 31

Picture no: 17026t.tif Picture no: 17333t.tif Picture no: 17203t.tif Twin Audio 3 Open&Start system with Parking distance sensors 3 Twin Audio provides rear seat occupants electronic key and radio When reverse gear is selected, the parking the opportunity to listen to a different frequency remote control 3 distance sensors switch on automatically. audio source than the one selected by the The Open&Start system allows the vehicle The parking distance sensors can also be driver on the Infotainment system. to be locked and unlocked, including anti- activated at speeds of less than 15 mph Only an audio source that is not currently theft locking system and the Vauxhall (25 km/h) by pressing the r button on active on the Infotainment system can be alarm system 3 without a mechanical key the instrument panel. controlled using Twin Audio. and the engine to be started and stopped using a Start / Stop button. All the driver If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when Two headphone connections are available, has to do is carry the electronic key around reversing, a series of signals can be heard with separate volume controls. with him. in the vehicle interior. The interval between Further information is available in the the signals becomes shorter as the Infotainment system operating distance is reduced. If the distance is less instructions. than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous. 32 In brief

Picture no: 17961t.tif Picture no: 17018t.tif Picture no: 17019t.tif Sport mode 3 Tyre pressure loss monitoring After tyre pressure is corrected or a tyre To activate system or wheel is changed, the system must be Press SPORT button. (DDS = Deflation Detection initialised by pressing the DDS button. SPORT mode is used to change damping 3, System) 3 steering 3, throttle application and the The Deflation Detection System shift point for Easytronic 3 and automatic continuously monitors the speed of all transmission 3 while driving. wheels while driving. If a tyre loses pressure, it grows smaller and therefore Damping and steering become more direct rotates more quickly than the other wheels. and provide better contact with the road If the system detects a difference in speed, surface. The engine reacts more quickly to the control indicator w illuminates red. accelerator movements. With Easytronic 3 and automatic transmission 3, the shift times are shortened and shifting takes place at higher revs (not with cruise control enabled 3). In brief 33

Ü Board Computer

BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres

Picture no: 17334t.tif Picture no: 17126t.tif Picture no: Tyre pressure monitoring Adaptive Forward Lighting Curve lighting system 3 (AFL) 3 The Xenon light beam pivots based on Improves lighting in curves (curve lighting) steering wheel position and speed (from The tyre pressure monitoring system approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)). continually checks the pressure and on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight speed of all four wheels while driving. system. The headlights shine at an angle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel. of travel. The inflation pressures of the individual wheels are transmitted to a controller, Motorway lighting where they are compared. At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped beam The current tyre pressures can be automatically raises slightly, thereby displayed on the Graphical Information increasing headlight range. Display or the Colour Information Display 3. Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in the form of messages on the information display whilst driving. 34 In brief

Picture no: 17979t.tif Picture no: 17059t.tif Picture no: 17092t.tif Panoramic windscreen 3 Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 Cargo box 3 To open Collapsible box to divide the luggage z Pull the handle below the seat Turn the handle to the right and move the compartment. z Slide the seat bench to the desired roof lining rearward to a suitable position. The cargo box may only be loaded when position To close the backrests are engaged in an upright Move the roof lining forward to a suitable z Release the handle and engage the seat position. bench position. When moved all the way forward, When removing, start with the right half. the roof lining engages in position. In brief 35

Picture no: 17087t.tif Picture no: 17980t.tif Picture no: 17981t.tif FlexOrganizer 3 Luggage compartment cover, Astra TwinTop The side walls contain retaining strips, Estate With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra where various components can be To open unites the benefits of a coupe with those of attached to divide the luggage Push handle on luggage compartment a convertible. compartment or fasten loads. cover down. The cover automatically To optimise safety, the Astra TwinTop is The system consists of unrolls. equipped with a rollover protection system z adapters with reinforced windscreen frame and the z variable partition net choice of fixed or deployable anti-roll bars z mesh pockets for the side walls in addition to the front and side airbag z hooks in the luggage compartment systems. The roof is operated with the buttons on the roof console above the mirror or with the remote control. To improve luggage compartment accessibility, the electric loading aid makes it possible to raise the open roof when it is stowed in the luggage compartment. 36 Instruments Instruments

Picture no: 17020t.tif Picture no: Control indicators – The electronic key is in the wrong Control indicators ...... 36 The control indicators described here are location in the vehicle interior (do not put key in luggage Instrument display...... 45 not present in all vehicles. The descriptions however, apply to all instrument versions. compartment or in front of Information display ...... 46 information display), or the Radio reception 3...... 64 electronic key is not in the vehicle Remote control for Infotainment 0 interior, or influence from an 3 system 3 and information display .. 64 Open&Start system external interference source Twin Audio 3 ...... 64 If it flashes: (radio masts, interfering Mobile telephones and radio System has not detected electronic key in transmitters in the vicinity). equipment 3...... 65 vehicle interior. The reasons for this may – or – be: Infotainment system 3...... 65 – Electronic key failure, for emergency operation – see page 73. If the battery in the electronic key needs changing, InSP3 appears in the service display or, in vehicles with check control 3, by an appropriate message in the information display – see pages 44, 74. Instruments 37

If it illuminates: I Fault in Open&Start system. 9 Warning Engine oil pressure Lock or unlock vehicle using remote control The control indicator illuminates when the When the engine is off, considerably or emergency key if necessary – ignition is switched on and goes out shortly more force is needed to brake and steer. see page 80, or attempt to use the spare after the engine starts. key. Do not remove key until vehicle has come If it illuminates when the engine is running: to a standstill, otherwise the steering Emergency operation – see page 81. Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This column lock could engage unexpectedly. If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that may result in damage to the engine and/or locking of the drive wheels: the steering column is still locked: move Check oil level before consulting a steering wheel to and fro a little and press 1. Depress clutch. workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Start / Stop button again. 2. Shift manual transmission or Authorised Repairer. If 0 illuminates whilst driving a system Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic error has occurred that may eventually transmission 3, set selector lever to N. lead to a complete failure. 3. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly If 0 illuminates or flashes: the Start / Stop as possible without impeding other button must be held depressed slightly vehicles. longer to switch off the ignition. It is 4. Switch off ignition. possible that the vehicle will not start during the next start attempt. If 0 continues to flash or remains illuminated, consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 38 Instruments

v Airbag systems 3, belt tensioners, deployable anti-roll bars 3 see pages 112, 121, 130.

v Electronic Stability Programme (ESP®Plus) 3 see page 208.

X Seat belt 3 Picture no: 17020t.tif Picture no: The control indicator illuminates after the R ignition is turned on until the seat belt is Brake system, 9 Warning fastened. When driving begins, the control clutch system indicator flashes. Apply seat belt– The control indicator illuminates when the If it illuminates when the handbrake is not see page 113. ignition is switched on if the handbrake is applied: stop the vehicle; interrupt your applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is journey immediately. Consult a Q too low. Further information – workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Door open see pages 222, 296. Authorised Repairer. Illuminated when a door or the luggage compartment is open. For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control indicator flashes for a few seconds when the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is not applied. Instruments 39

IDS+ p A Interactive Driving System 3, Alternator Engine electronics, Continuous Damping Control (CDC) 3, The control indicator illuminates when the Transmission electronics 3, SPORT mode 3 ignition is switched on and goes out shortly Electronic immobiliser, IDS+ – see page 208, after the engine starts. Diesel fuel filter 3, CDC – see page 210, Fault If it illuminates when the engine is running: SPORT mode – see page 210. Stop, switch engine off. Battery is not The control indicator illuminates for a few charged. Engine cooling may not be seconds when the ignition is switched on. S operating. With a diesel engine the brake If it illuminates when the engine is running: Engine oil level 3 servo unit may stop operating. Check the Fault in engine electronics or transmission The engine oil level is checked1) drive belt before contacting a workshop. electronics. Electronics switch to automatically. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised emergency running programme, fuel Illuminated: engine oil level too low. Check Repairer. consumption may increase and driveability engine oil level and top up if necessary – of the vehicle may be impaired – see page 292. W see page 206. Consult a workshop Coolant temperature immediately. We recommend your 8 If it illuminates when the engine is running: Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Exterior lights Stop, switch engine off. Coolant Illuminated together with InSP4 in the The control indicator is illuminated when temperature too high: danger of service display: have the diesel fuel filter the exterior lights are on – see page 134. engine damage. Check coolant level drained of water – see page 294. immediately – see page 294. r If it flashes when the ignition is on: Parking distance sensors 3, Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; see page 214. the engine cannot be started – see page 67.

1) Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation – see page 308. 40 Instruments

> Front fog lights 3 The control indicator is illuminated when the front fog lights are on – see page 135.

C Main beam The control indicator is illuminated when main beam is on and during headlight flash – see page 15.

r Fog tail light Picture no: 17020t.tif Picture no: The control indicator is illuminated when O Y the fog tail light is on – see page 135. Turn signal lights Fuel level The relevant control indicator flashes when If it is illuminated: low fuel level. Fuel gauge the turn signal is on. Rapid flash: failure of in reserve area. a turn signal bulb or the corresponding If it flashes: fuel supply used up, fill tank 3 fuse or failure of a trailer turn signal bulb . immediately. Both control indicators flash when the hazard warning lights are active. Never let the tank run dry! Bulb replacement – see page 268. Petrol engines: erratic fuel supply can Fuses – see page 261. cause catalytic converter to overheat – see page 203. Diesel engines: if the tank is run dry, bleed the fuel system as described on page 243. Instruments 41

T Z u Winter programme of automatic Exhaust emission 3 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS), transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 The control indicator illuminates when the see page 224. Control indicator is illuminated when winter ignition is switched on and goes out shortly programme is enabled. after the engine starts. Further information – If it illuminates when the engine is running: see pages 177, 185, 192. Fault in emission control system. The permitted emission limits may be 1 exceeded. Consult a workshop. We SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3 recommend your Vauxhall Authorised or Easytronic 3 Repairer. The control indicator is illuminated when If it flashes when the engine is running: SPORT mode is engaged. Fault that can lead to destruction of the Further information – catalytic converter is indicated – see pages 176, 184, 191. see page 205. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your y Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Seat occupancy recognition 3, see page 122. 42 Instruments

B Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL), Fault If it is illuminated: System fault. In the event of malfunction of the curve lighting pivot function, the relevant dipped beam light is deactivated. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. AFL – see page 137.

m Cruise control 3, Picture no: 17020t.tif Picture no: see page 212. ! w Preheating system 3, Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3, Diesel particle filter 3 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 Illuminated during preheating. Illuminated red: Preheating system switches on only if Tyre pressure loss – see page 217. outside temperature is low. Illuminated yellow: Flashing (in vehicles with diesel particle Fault in system – see pages 217, 218. filter): diesel particle filter requires Consult a workshop. We recommend your cleaning. As soon as the road and traffic Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. situation permits it, increase speed to more than 25 mph (40 km/h) for a brief period. The control indicator goes off as soon as cleaning is complete. Instruments 43

D Automatic mode of automatic transmission. 1-4 Current gear of automatic transmission. 1-5 or 1-6 3 Manual mode, current gear with Easytronic. For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a few seconds if A, M or R is selected when the engine is running but the foot brake is not depressed.

Picture no: 17022t.tif Transmission display 3 Display of the selected gear position with automatic transmission 3 or the selected gear with Easytronic 3: P Park position of automatic transmission. R Reverse gear. N Neutral or idling position. A Automatic mode of Easytronic. M Manual mode of Easytronic. 44 Instruments

ESP off Electronic Stability Programme 3 deactivated – see page 208. ESP on Electronic Stability Programme 3 activated – see page 208.

Picture no: 17335t.tif. Picture no: 17008t.tif Odometer display Service display Time display 3 InSP Service interval display. To switch between trip odometer and time Shows remaining distance display 3 give reset knob a short press. until next service. Setting the time Further information – see page 290. With time displayed, press reset knob in InSP2 Bulb failure 3 – see page 268. instrument: InSP3 Remote control has Press for approx. 2 seconds: low battery voltage 3 – Hours flash see page 69. Press briefly InSP4 Water in diesel fuel filter 3. Set hours Consult a workshop. Press for approx. 2 seconds Minutes flash On vehicles with check control 3, a Press briefly message is shown on the display Set minutes instead of InSP2 and InSP3. Press for approx. 2 seconds Clock is started Instruments 45

Picture no: 17021t.tif Picture no: Picture no: 17023t.tif Instrument display Odometer Fuel gauge On some versions, the pointer of the Records the miles (kilometres) driven. Pointer in left tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge Trip odometer zone or briefly moves to its end position when the To reset, hold the reset knob depressed for Y illuminated = Reserve area ignition is switched on. a few seconds with the ignition on. Pointer in left Tachometer Resetting in vehicles with clock display 3 zone or Indicates engine speed. in odometer: Y flashing = Fill up – see page 201 Warning zone: maximum permissible If the clock display is active, first switch to engine speed exceeded; danger to engine. the odometer display. Then briefly press Never run the tank dry! the reset knob – see next page. Diesel engines: if the tank is run dry, bleed Speedometer the fuel system as described on page 243. Indicates the vehicle speed. Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, the amount of fuel required to fill the tank may be less than the specified tank capacity. 46 Instruments

11:25} 21.5°C 12:01 17,0°C Range 257 miles FM 3 90,6MHz Range REG AS RDS TP RDS [TP] Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal 257miles 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36

Picture no: 17336t.tif Picture no: 17337t.tif Picture no: 17329t.tif Information display Board Information Display 3 Graphical Information Display 3, Triple Information Display Display of time, outside temperature and Colour Information Display 3 Display of time, outside temperature and date / Infotainment system (when it is on). Display of time, outside temperature, date / Infotainment system (when it is on). An F in the display indicates a fault. date / Infotainment system (when it is on) and Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3. When the ignition is off, the time, date and Have the cause of the fault remedied. outside temperature can be presented for We recommend that you consult your The Graphical Information Display 15 seconds by briefly pressing one of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. presents the information in monochrome. two buttons below the display. The Colour Information Display presents the information in colour. An F in the display indicates a fault. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Instruments 47

The type of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the vehicle and the settings of the trip computer 3, Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 and Infotainment system 3. : Some information appears in the display 8:56 -5,5°C in an abbreviated form. Slippery road Electronic Climate Control (ECC) – 07.04.2004 -2,5°C see page 167. Infotainment system – see Infotainment system instructions. OK An F in the display indicates a fault. Have the cause of the fault remedied. Picture no: 17336t.tif Picture no: 17338t.tif We recommend that you consult your Outside temperature In vehicles with Graphical Information Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. A fall in temperature is indicated Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3, immediately and a rise in temperature a warning message appears the display as after a time delay. a warning for icy road surfaces. There is no message below -5 °C. If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, the symbol : illuminates in the Triple 9 Warning Information Display or the Board Information Display 3 as a warning for Caution: the road surface may already icy road surfaces. : remains illuminated be icy even though the display indicates until temperatures reach at least 5 °C. a few degrees above 0 °C. 48 Instruments

Correcting time 3 Deactivating / activating automatic time Some RDS transmitters do not send a synchronisation: Infotainment system off, correct time signal. If the incorrect time is press Ö and ; below the display: 8:56 5,5°C continually displayed, switch off automatic Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock 3 time synchronisation and set the time display is now in setting mode. manually - see next column. 07.04.2004 Press Ö twice (until year flashes). The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. Press Ö and hold down for approx. 3 seconds until } flashes in display 3 and "RDS TIME" appears (years flash during this time). Press ;, display indicates: RDS TIME 0 = Off. Picture no: 17024t.tif Press ;, display indicates: Triple Information Display RDS TIME 1 = On. Setting date and time Press Ö three times. Infotainment system off: press Ö and ; below the display as follows: Press Ö for approx. 2 seconds: Day flashes ;:Set day Ö:Month flashes ;:Set month Ö:Year flashes ;:Set year Ö:Hours flash ;: Set hours Ö:Minutes flash ;:Set minutes Ö:Clock is started Instruments 49

11:25} 21.5°C Range

257miles

Picture no: 17337t.tif Picture no: 17012t.tif Picture no: 17014t.tif Board Information Display 3, Select options via the menus and with Menu options can also be selected with the selecting functions the buttons / four-way button on the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. 3 Functions and settings of some Infotainment system . The relevant menu options are then shown equipment 3 can be accessed via on the subsequent row of the display. the Board Information Display. If check control 3 issues a warning This is done via the menus and the message, the display is blocked from other buttons / four-way button on the functions. Acknowledge the message by Infotainment system 3 or with the left pressing the right or left button of the four- adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. way button or by pressing the left adjuster 3 The relevant menu options are then shown wheel on the steering wheel. If there are on the subsequent row of the display. several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. System settings – see page 50. Trip computer – see page 52. 50 Instruments

The functions are displayed in the following order: z Time synchronisation z Time, setting hours 11:25} 21.5°C z Time, setting minutes 11:25} 21.5°C z Date, setting day z Date, setting month System z Date, setting year Clock Sync.On z Ignition logic z Language selection z Setting units of measure

Picture no: 17337t.tif Picture no: 17337t.tif Board Information Display 3, Correcting time 3 system settings Some RDS transmitters do not send a Press the Settings button of the correct time signal. If the incorrect time is Infotainment system. Menu item Audio or continually displayed, deactivate 3 System will appear. automatic time synchronisation and set the time manually – see next page. Press the lower button of the four-way button to reach menu item System. After pressing the right-hand part of the four- way button, the first function of the System menu is shown. Some of the functions appear on the display in an abbreviated form. Instruments 51

The automatic setting is indicated by } in the display. To correct time with the help of RDS, select the menu item for time synchronisation from the Settings menu. 11:25} 21.5°C 11:25} 21.5°C Make the desired setting. Setting date and time English Unit Europe-SI Select the menu item for time and date setting from the Settings menu. Make the desired setting. The setting is saved when the menu item is exited. Picture no: 17337t.tif Picture no: 17337t.tif Ignition logic 3 Language selection Setting units of measure See Infotainment system instructions. You can select the display language for You can select which units of measure are some functions. to be used. Select the menu item for language from the Select the menu item for units of measure Settings menu and make the desired from the Settings menu and make the setting. desired setting. 52 Instruments

Board Information Display 3, Average consumption trip computer 3 Displays average consumption. The trip computer provides information on Calculation can be restarted at any time – driving data, which is continually recorded see next page. and evaluated electronically. 11:25} 21.5°C Effective consumption Access trip computer vehicle data by Displays amount of fuel consumed. pressing the BC button on the Infotainment Inst. Consumpt. Calculation can be restarted at any time – system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the see next page. steering wheel. Average speed Some of the functions appear on the 7.6miles/gal Displays average speed. Calculation can display in an abbreviated form. be restarted at any time - see next page. Once an audio function has been selected, Stoppages in the journey with the ignition the subsequent rows of the trip computer Picture no: 17337t.tif off are not included in the calculations. function are displayed. Instantaneous consumption Distance travelled Display changes depending on speed: The functions are displayed in the following Displays number of miles (kilometres) order: Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h). driven. Calculation can be restarted at any time – see next page. z Instantaneous consumption Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h). z Average consumption z Effective consumption z Average speed z Distance travelled z Range z Stop watch Instruments 53

Resetting trip computer information The following trip computer information can be reset (restart of measurement / calculation): 11:25} 21.5°C 11:25} 21.5°C z Average consumption z Effective consumption z Average speed Range Stop Watch z Distance travelled Select the desired trip computer 257miles 01:22:32h information. Reset by pressing the left adjuster wheel on the steering wheel or the right or left button Picture no: 17337t.tif Picture no: 17337t.tif on the four-way button: Range Stop watch Press for more than Range is calculated from current fuel tank Operation with the four-way button: 2 seconds Current value content and instantaneous consumption. Press right button Start / Stop Press for more than The display shows average values. Press left button 4 seconds All values After refuelling, the vehicle updates the at least 2 seconds Reset Interruption of power supply range automatically after a brief delay. Operating using the left adjuster wheel 3 If the power supply has been interrupted or If the fuel in the tank will allow less than on the steering wheel: if the battery voltage has dropped too low, 30 miles (50 km) of travel, the warning the values stored in the trip computer will "Range" appears on the display. Press Start / Stop be lost. 54 Instruments

Range 257 miles

Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal

19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36

Picture no: 17329t.tif Picture no: 17012t.tif Picture no: 17013t.tif Graphical Information Display 3 To select with four-way button: To select using the multi-function button: or Colour Information Display 3, Select menu items via menus and with Turn Mark menu items selecting functions the buttons / four-way button of the or commands, select The functions and settings of some Infotainment system. functions. equipment 3 can be accessed via the If check control 3 issues a warning Press Select marked item, Graphical Information Display or the message, the display is blocked from other confirm command. Colour Information Display. functions. Acknowledge the message by To exit a menu, turn the multi-function Functions are selected and executed in the pressing the right or left portion of the four- button left or right to Return or Main and menu on the display using the four-way way button. If there are several warning select. button, the multi-function button 3 on the messages, acknowledge them one at a Infotainment system or the left wheel 3 time. If check control 3 issues a warning on the steering wheel. message, the display is blocked from other functions. Acknowledge the message by pressing the multi-function button. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. Instruments 55

7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3 Time, Date 19:36 Language ᕃ 90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004 Contrast Day / Night

19,5° 19:36 6 Ign. logic

Picture no: 17014t.tif Picture no: 17331t.tif Picture no: 17332t.tif To select using the left adjuster wheel 3 on For each functional area there is a main System settings the steering wheel: page (Main), which is selected at the The settings are accessed via the Settings Turn up Previous top edge of the display (not with the menu. menu item Infotainment system CD 30 or the Press the Main button 3 (not found on all Mobile Phone Portal): Turn down Next Infotainment systems) on the Infotainment z menu item Audio, system (call up main display). z 3 Navigation , Press the Settings button of the Press Select marked item, z 3 Telephone , Infotainment system. On Infotainment confirm command z 3 Trip computer . System CD 30, make sure no menu has If check control 3 issues a warning For Audio, Navigation 3 and Telephone 3 been selected. message, the display is blocked from other functions – see Infotainment system The Settings menu is displayed. functions. Acknowledge the message by instructions. pressing the left adjuster wheel. If there are several warning messages, acknowledge them one at a time. 56 Instruments

Correcting time 3 In systems with GPS receiver1), date and time are set automatically upon receipt of 7 Time, Date 19,5° 19:36 a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 does not match local time, it can be Time, Date Time 19:36 corrected manually or automatically by receiving an RDS time signal2) 3. Language Deutsch Date 10 . 07 . 2004 Some RDS transmitters do not send correct Units English time signals. If the incorrect time is Contrast Español displayed often, deactivate automatic Day / Night ... 6 Synchron. clock automatical. time synchronisation 3 and set the time manually. 6 Ign. logic To correct time with the help of RDS, select Picture no: 17340t.tif menu item Synchron. clock automatical. Picture no: 17341t.tif Setting date and time from the Time, Date menu. Language selection Select menu item Time, Date from the You can select the display language for Settings menu. The box in front of Synchron. clock some functions. automatical. will be ticked; The menu for Time, Date is displayed. see Fig. 17340 T. Select menu item Language from the Select the menu items required: Settings menu. Make the desired setting. The available languages are displayed.

1) GPS = Global Positioning System, satellite system for world-wide positioning. 2) RDS = Radio Data System. Instruments 57

7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36 7 Settings 19,5° 19:36 7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36 X Deutsch Time, Date English Language ~ Europe-SI Español Units | Japan 12 Dutch Contrast | Great Britain French Day / Night | USA Italiano 6 Ign. logic

Picture no: 17342t.tif Picture no: 17343t.tif Picture no: 17926t.tif Select the desired language. Setting units of measure Adjusting contrast 3 Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of You can select which units of measure are (Graphical Information Display) the menu item. to be used. Select menu item Contrast from the Settings menu. In systems with voice output 3, when the Select menu item Units from the Settings language setting of the display is changed menu. The menu for Contrast is displayed. the system will ask whether the The available units are displayed. Confirm the required setting. announcement language should also be Select the desired unit. changed – see Infotainment system instructions. Selections are indicated by a o in front of the menu item. 58 Instruments

Setting display mode 3 The display can be adjusted to suit the light conditions, black or coloured text on a light background or white or coloured text on a Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 dark background. BC 1 All values Select menu item Day / Night from the BC 2 Range 257 miles Settings menu. 257.0 miles Timer The options are displayed. Ø40mph Tyres Automatic: adapted based on vehicle Inst. consumpt. 7.6 miles/gal 31.0 gal lighting. Ø 7.0 miles/gal Always day design: black or coloured text 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x 19:36 on light background. Always night design: white or coloured Picture no: 17344t.tif Picture no: 17329t.tif 3 Range text on dark background. Graphical Information Display or Colour Information Display 3, Range is calculated from current fuel tank Selections are indicated by a o in front trip computer 3 content and instantaneous consumption. of the menu item. The display shows average values. The trip computers provide information on Ignition logic 3 driving data, which is continually recorded After refuelling, the vehicle updates the See Infotainment system instructions. and evaluated electronically. range automatically after a brief delay. The trip computer main page provides information on range and instantaneous consumption. To display other trip computer data, press the BC button on the Infotainment system 3, select the trip computer menu front the display or press the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Instruments 59

Distance travelled Shows the number of miles (kilometres) travelled. The measurement can be restarted at any time. Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 Average speed BC 1 All values Calculation of average consumption. The BC 2 measurement can be restarted at any time. 257.0 miles Range Timer 33miles Stoppages in the journey with the ignition Ø40mph off are not included in the calculations. Tyres 31.0 gal Effective consumption OK Shows the amount of fuel consumed. The Ø 7.0 miles/gal measurement can be restarted at any time. Picture no: 17345t.tif Average consumption Picture no: 17344t.tif If the fuel in the tank will allow less than Calculation of average consumption. Resetting trip computer information 30 miles (50 km) of travel, the warning The measurement can be restarted The following trip computer information "Range" appears on the display. at any time. can be reset (restart measurements): Acknowledge the menu item as described z distance on page 54. z average speed z Instantaneous consumption effective consumption z Display changes depending on speed: average consumption Display in gal/h below 8 mph (13 km/h). Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer menu. Display in mpg above 8 mph (13 km/h). 60 Instruments

Interruption of power supply If the power supply has been interrupted or if the battery voltage has dropped too low, Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 the values stored in the trip computer will be lost. All values All values

257.0 miles 257.0 miles Ø40mph Ø40mph

31.0 gal 31.0 gal Ø 7.0 miles/gal Ø 7.0 miles/gal

Picture no: 17346t.tif Picture no: 17347t.tif The information of the two trip computers To reset all information of a trip computer, can be reset separately, making it possible select menu item All values. to evaluate data from different time After resetting, "- - -" is displayed for the periods. trip computer information selected. The Select the desired trip computer recalculated values are displayed after a information. brief delay. The value for the selected function will be reset and recalculated. Instruments 61

The desired stop watch display can be selected from the Options menu 3: Driving Time excl. Stops Ü Board Computer 19,5° 19:36 Ü Board Computer The time the vehicle is in motion is BC 1 recorded. Stationary time is not included. BC 1 BC 2 00:00:00 Driving Time incl. Stops BC 2 Timer The time the vehicle is in motion is Timer recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary Tyres Start with the key in the starter switch is Tyres Reset included. Options Travel Time Measurement of the time from manual Picture no: 17348t.tif activation via Start to manual deactivation Picture no: 17334t.tif Stop watch via Reset. Display of current tyre pressure 3 Select menu item Timer from the Board Select menu item Tyres from the Board Computer menu. Computer menu. The Timer menu is displayed. The current pressure of each tyre is To start, select menu item Start. displayed. To reset, select menu item Reset. Further information – see page 218. 62 Instruments

Check control 3 Examples of warning messages for the Check control monitors several fluid levels, Graphical Information Display 3 and tyre pressure 3, the radio frequency Colour Information Display 3 are depicted. remote control batteries, Vauxhall alarm On the Board Information Display, system 3, and important external lights, messages appear in an abbreviated form. including cables and fuses. When towing, Acknowledge warning messages trailer lighting is also monitored. as described on pages 49, 54. Coolant level Warning messages appear on the display. Unacknowledged warning messages check If there are several warning messages, they can be re-displayed later. are displayed one after the other. Warning messages: Some of the warning messages appear on OK the display in an abbreviated form. Remote Control Battery check Picture no: 17339t.tif Brakelight switch Battery voltage of remote control or check electronic key of Open&Start system too low – see page 69. Fault. Brake light does not come on when brake applied. Have cause of fault remedied immediately. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Safeguard check Fault. System error in Vauxhall alarm system. Have cause of fault remedied immediately. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Instruments 63

If there is a fault in the lighting system, the In vehicles with tyre pressure control Wash fluid level respective location of the fault is displayed system 3, if there is major loss of pressure check as text, e.g.: in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at Fluid level in windscreen wash system Brakelight fault, e.g.: too low. Topping up wash fluid – check right Attention! see page 299. Rear left tyre Rear window wash system and headlight In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring pressure loss wash system 3 are deactivated if wash system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the (value in psi / bar) fluid level is low. display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.: Stop immediately and check tyre. Tyre Tyre pressure pressure monitoring system 3 – Coolant level check rear see page 218. check right tyre Fluid level in engine cooling system is low. (value in psi / bar) Check coolant level immediately – Check tyre pressure at next opportunity see page 294. using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure Interruption of power supply 3 monitoring system – see page 218. Stored warning messages appear on Checking tyre pressure – see page 326. the display one after the other. 64 Instruments

Radio reception 3 Car radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting companies cannot guarantee the same quality of reception as obtained with a domestic radio using an overhead antenna. z Changes in distance from the transmitter, z multi-path reception due to reflection and z shadowing Picture no: 17015t.tif Picture no: 17026t.tif may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss 3 of reception altogether. Remote control for Infotainment Twin Audio system 3 and information display Twin Audio provides rear seat occupants The functions of the Infotainment system 3 the opportunity to listen to a different and the information display can be audio source than the one selected by the operated with the buttons on the steering driver on the Infotainment system. wheel. Only an audio source that is not currently Further information – see page 49 and active on the Infotainment system can be the relevant operating instructions. controlled using Twin Audio. Two headphone connections are available, with separate volume controls. Further information is available in the Infotainment system operating instructions. Instruments 65

Mobile telephones and radio Obtain advice on predetermined For reasons of safety, we recommend that equipment 3 installation locations for the external you do not use the phone while driving. The Vauxhall installation instructions and antenna and equipment holder and ways Even use of a hands-free set can be a the operating guidelines provided by the of using devices with transmission power of distraction while driving. Be sure to observe telephone manufacturer must be observed more than 10 Watts. We recommend that any country-specific regulations. when fitting and operating a mobile you consult your Vauxhall Authorised telephone. Failure to do so could invalidate Repairer, who will have brackets and 9 Warning the vehicle’s operating permit (EU Directive various installation kits available as When used in the vehicle interior, mobile 95/54/EG). accessories and will install them in accordance with regulations. telephones and radio equipment (CB) Prerequisites for fault-free operation: with integrated antenna may cause z professionally installed exterior antenna malfunctions in the vehicle electronics. to obtain the maximum range possible, Mobile telephones and radio equipment z maximum transmission power 10 Watt, (CB) should only be used with an antenna fitted on the vehicle exterior. z installation of the telephone in a suitable spot (see information on page 124). Infotainment system 3 The Infotainment system is operated as described in the operating instructions. 66 Keys, doors, bonnet Keys, doors, bonnet Replacement keys The key is a constituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer guarantees problem- free operation of the electronic immobiliser. When electronic keys of the Open&Start system are being replaced, all keys must be handed to the dealer for programming. Keep the spare key in a safe spot. Locks – see page 305, Open&Start system, electronic keys – Electronic immobiliser...... 67 see page 70. Picture no: 17027t.tif Radio frequency remote control 3 Key with foldaway key section 3 with mechanical key ...... 68 Lock cylinders Press button to extend. Press button to Open&Start system 3 ...... 70 Designed to free-wheel if they are retract; key section engages audibly. Central locking system ...... 76 forcefully rotated without the correct key or if the correct key is not fully inserted. Fault when locking or unlocking...... 80 Luggage compartment...... 81 To reset, turn cylinder with the correct key Vauxhall alarm system 3...... 83 until its slot is vertical, remove key and then Child safety locks...... 86 re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key through 180° and repeat Bonnet ...... 86 operation. Car Pass The Car Pass contains all of the vehicle’s data and should therefore not be kept in the vehicle. Have your Car Pass to hand when consulting a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Keys, doors, bonnet 67

Picture no: 17349t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif Picture no: 17028t.tif Electronic immobiliser Control indicator for electronic If control indicator A illuminates after The system checks whether the vehicle immobiliser the engine is started, there is a fault in may be started with the mechanical key or Control indicator A illuminates briefly the engine electronics or electronic key of the Open&Start system 3 when the ignition is switched on. transmission electronics 3 (see pages 180, that is being used. If the key is recognised If the control indicator flashes when the 186, 194, 206) or there is water in the diesel 3 as "authorised" the vehicle can be started. ignition is on, there is a fault in the system; fuel filter (see page 294). The check takes place via a transponder in the engine cannot be started. Switch off Note the key. the ignition and then repeat the start The electronic immobiliser does not lock The electronic immobiliser activates itself attempt. the doors. Therefore, after leaving the automatically after the key has been If control indicator A continues to flash, vehicle always lock it and switch on the 3 removed from the ignition or, with the try to start the engine using the spare key Vauxhall alarm system – Open&Start system 3, when the engine is and consult a workshop. We recommend see pages 76, 83. switched off by pressing the Start / Stop your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. button. 68 Keys, doors, bonnet

Store and activate personal vehicle settings using the remote control The climate control and instrument illumination settings are automatically stored specifically for the vehicle key used. Different settings are stored for each remote control. Use of a remote control will activate the settings associated with it. Central locking system, mechanical anti-theft locking system, see page 76. Vauxhall alarm system 3, Picture no: 17029t.tif Picture no: 17030t.tif see page 83. Radio frequency remote control 3 The radio frequency remote control has a Electrically operated door windows 3, with mechanical key range of approx. 3 metres. This range can see page 141. be affected by outside influences. Aim the Radio frequency remote control in version Astra TwinTop, remote control at the vehicle to operate. with Open&Start system – see page 70. see page 146. The remote control is integrated in the key. Handle the remote control with care, protect it from moisture and high Used to operate: temperatures and avoid unnecessary z central locking system, operation. z mechanical anti-theft locking system, z Vauxhall alarm system 3. The hazard warning lights come on to indicate that the remote control is The windows of vehicles with electrically operational. operated windows in all doors 3 can also be opened or closed from outside using the remote control - see page 79. On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be opened or closed with the remote control. Keys, doors, bonnet 69

Fault Make sure that you dispose of old batteries If the central locking system cannot be in accordance with environmental operated with the radio frequency remote protection regulations. control, it may be due to the following: Key with fixed key section z The range of the remote control has Entrust battery replacement to a been exceeded. workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall z Remote control battery voltage is too Authorised Repairer. low. Battery replacement – Radio frequency remote control see next column. synchronisation z Frequent, repeated operation of the After changing the battery, unlock the remote control outside the reception door with the key in the lock - range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from see next page. vehicle, remote control is then no longer Picture no: 17031t.tif Inserting the key in the ignition lock recognised). Remote control Remote control battery replacement synchronises the remote control. synchronisation - see right-hand column. Key with foldaway key section z If the central locking system is Replace the battery as soon as the range overloaded as a result of repeated of the remote control begins to shrink. operation at short intervals. The power Extending the key – see page 66. supply is cut off for a brief period. Open the remote control. Replace the z Interference from higher-power radio battery (battery type – see page 335), waves from other sources. noting installation position. Close the To eliminate the cause of the fault, remote control. contact your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Open driver’s door with key – see next pages. 70 Keys, doors, bonnet

Picture no: 17333t.tif Picture no: 17032t.tif Picture no: 17033t.tif Open&Start system 3 The electronic key must be within the When the Start / Stop button is pressed, The Open&Start system allows the vehicle external reception range about 1 metre the system re-checks the authorisation. to be locked and unlocked, from the vehicle in order to lock and unlock The electronic key has to be recognised (including the anti-theft locking system the vehicle. in the interior in order to do this. After and the Vauxhall alarm system 3), If the electronic key is recognized as the key has been authorised, the ignition and the engine to be started and stopped "authorised", the vehicle can be unlocked switches on. At the same time, the without a mechanical key. All the driver has by pulling a door handle or the button electronic immobiliser is switched off and to do is keep the key on his person. beneath the tailgate handle and the doors the electro-mechanical steering column lock is released. The windows of vehicles with electrically and the tailgate can be opened. operated windows in all doors 3 can also Pressing the Start / Stop button again with be opened or closed from outside using the the brake or clutch pedal depressed or in P remote control of the electronic key - or N with automatic transmission 3 starts see page 79. the engine. Press the button for at least one second with the vehicle stationary or hold On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be until the engine starts. opened or closed with the remote control of the electronic key. Keys, doors, bonnet 71

If the brake or clutch pedal is depressed, the engine can be started right away with a single press on the Start / Stop button. Releasing the Start / Stop button interrupts the starting procedure. The engine and the ignition are switched off by pressing the Start / Stop button again. The vehicle must be stationary. The immobiliser is activated at the same time. If the ignition has been switched off and the vehicle is stationary, the steering column lock activates automatically when the driver’s door is opened or closed. Picture no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17035t.tif The electronic key must be within the The vehicle is locked from the outside with Radio frequency remote control interior reception in order to switch the the doors closed by touching the sensor The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by ignition on or off. We recommend that panel in the door handle of one of the front conventional means using the remote the driver carries the electronic key on his doors. The electronic key must be within control with the buttons on the electronic or her person. If the electronic key is not the external reception range of key. recognised, try a different position for approximately one metre from the vehicle. In addition, the anti-theft locking system the key. The Open&Start system 3 does not the lock and Vauxhall alarm system can be armed Do not put the electronic key in the the vehicle automatically if the electronic and disabled using the remote control. luggage compartment or in front of the key is outside the external reception range The windows of vehicles with electrically information display. of approximately one metre from the operated windows in all doors 3 can also vehicle. be opened or closed from outside using the remote control.

6 72 Keys, doors, bonnet

The remote control has a range of approx. If the control indicator 0 is permanently 3 metres. This range can be affected by on, an error has occurred in the system. outside influences. Aim the remote control Lock or unlock vehicle using the radio at the vehicle to operate. frequency remote control or the emergency Handle the remote control with care, key if necessary – see page 80, or try using protect it from moisture and high the spare key. temperatures and avoid unnecessary If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that operation. the steering column is still locked: move The hazard warning lights come on to steering wheel to and fro a little and press indicate that the remote control is Start / Stop button again. operational. Illumination of 0 whilst driving indicates Storing and retrieving personal vehicle a system fault. Consult a workshop settings with the electronic key immediately. We recommend your Picture no: 17036t.tif Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The climate control and instrument Control indicator for Open&Start illumination settings are automatically system 0 Emergency operation – see page 73. stored specifically for the vehicle key used. If the control indicator 0 flashes with Lockable glove compartment, Different settings are stored for each the ignition switched on or with the engine Astra TwinTop with Open&Start system 3 electronic key. Use of an electronic key will running an operating error has occurred, In addition to the electronic key of the activate the settings associated with it. e.g. the electronic key is no longer within Open&Start system, there is a standard key the reception range of the vehicle interior. Central locking system, without remote control for the glove During the next starting procedure the mechanical anti-theft locking system, compartment lock. engine may not be able to be started. Press see page 76. Start / Stop key slightly longer to switch the Vauxhall alarm system 3, ignition off. see page 83. Flashing of 0 can also be an indication of Electrically operated door windows 3, complete failure of the electronic key. In see page 141. this case operation is only possible using Astra TwinTop, the emergency facility – see page 73. see page 146. InSP3 in the service display or an appropriate message in the information 3 display indicates that the battery of the electronic key needs replacing – see page 74. Keys, doors, bonnet 73

Picture no: 17037t.tif Picture no: 17038t.tif Picture no: 17039t.tif Emergency operation Only the driver’s door can be locked and To start the engine, hold the electronic key If the Open&Start system or the electronic unlocked using the emergency key. Unlock at the marked position, depress brake key fails (control indicator 0 flashes or is the entire vehicle as described on page 80. pedal or clutch pedal or in vehicles with 3 permanently on) the driver’s door can be In model variants with Vauxhall alarm automatic transmission depress brake locked or unlocked with the emergency key system 3, the alarm may be triggered pedal and engage P or N, then press the in the electronic key: press locking when the vehicle is unlocked. Switch Start / Stop button. mechanism on underside and remove cap ignition on to deactivate alarm and release Press Start / Stop button for at least 1 toward the front by applying gentle the steering column lock: hold electronic second to switch the engine off. Lock all pressure to the cap. Push emergency key key at marked position (see Fig. 17039T in doors except driver’s door as described on towards the outside over the detent and next column) on the steering column page 80. Unlock driver’s door with remove. panelling and press the Start / Stop button. emergency key. Repeat procedure if necessary. This facility is only intended for emergencies. Replace battery in electronic key at the earliest opportunity or have the system repaired. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 74 Keys, doors, bonnet

Radio frequency remote control synchronisation The remote control synchronises itself automatically during every starting procedure.

Picture no: 17040t.tif Picture no: 17041t.tif Replacing battery in electronic key To replace the battery, press the locking Replace the battery immediately if the mechanism on the underside of the system is no longer working properly or electronic key and remove the cover the range of the radio frequency remote towards the front by applying gentle control is reducing. The need for a battery pressure - see page 73, Fig. 17037 T. Push change is indicated via InSP3 in the service off cover with emblem on the button side display or, in vehicles with check control 3, towards the outside. by an appropriate message in the display - Replace battery, for battery type – see page 44. see page 335, pay attention to installation position. Engage caps. Keys, doors, bonnet 75

Fault in Open&Start system or radio z If the central locking system is frequency remote control overloaded as a result of repeated If the central locking cannot be operated or operation at short intervals. The power the engine cannot be started, the cause supply is cut off for a brief period. may be one of the following: z Interference from higher-power radio z Electronic key out of reception range, or waves from other sources. out of range of remote control. To remedy the cause of the problem, move z Remote control battery voltage too low – electronic key or remote control to another see previous page for instructions on location or change the remote control how to change battery. battery. If the problem persists we z Frequent, repeated operation of the recommend that you consult your Vauxhall remote control outside the reception Authorised Repairer. range (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote Emergency operation – see page 73. control is then no longer recognised). 76 Keys, doors, bonnet

Securing with mechanical anti-theft locking system 9 Warning

Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot be unlocked from inside.

Picture no: 17042t.tif Picture no: 17034t.tif Central locking system Open&Start system with electronic key 3 For doors, boot lid / tailgate and tank flap. The electronic key must be outside of the vehicle. There must not be any electronic To lock key in the vehicle interior. All of the doors Radio frequency remote control with and the luggage compartment are locked mechanical key by touching the sensor in the handle of the Press button p on remote control. driver’s or front passenger’s door – or – by pressing button p of the electronic key’s remote control. Keys, doors, bonnet 77

Press button p of the electronic key’s remote control again. If the ignition was on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured. Lock buttons on all doors are positioned such that doors cannot be opened.

Picture no: 17043t.tif Picture no: 17044t.tif Radio frequency remote control with Open&Start system with electronic key 3 mechanical key All doors must be closed. The electronic key All doors must be closed. At the latest must be outside of the vehicle. No more 15 seconds after locking, press button p than 15 seconds after locking, touch the of the remote control again. sensor in the handle of the driver’s or front Lock buttons on all doors are positioned passenger’s door again such that doors cannot be opened. – or – If the ignition was on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the vehicle can be secured. 78 Keys, doors, bonnet

Picture no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17032t.tif Picture no: 17045t.tif To unlock Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Central locking switch for locking and Remote control with mechanical key The electronic key must be outside of the unlocking the doors from inside the Press button q on remote control. vehicle. The vehicle is unlocked by pulling vehicle a door handle or operating the button Press button m in the centre console: doors beneath the tailgate handle are locked or unlocked. – or – If the key is in the ignition, locking is only q by pressing button of the electronic possible if all doors are closed. key’s remote control. When the mechanical anti-theft locking system is active – see previous page – the doors cannot be unlocked with this button. Keys, doors, bonnet 79

Note z The LED in the central locking switch m z If the driver’s door is not closed properly, comes on for around 2 minutes after the central locking system will not lock. locking. z To lock the doors from within z With the Open&Start system 3 the vehicle (e.g. to prevent unwanted entry from cannot be unlocked until 2 seconds after outside), press central locking switch m locking. Within this time, a door handle in the centre console. can be pulled or the button beneath the z After unlocking with the key in the lock tailgate handle operated to check and opening the driver’s door, the entire whether the vehicle is locked. vehicle is unlocked. z The Open&Start system 3 does not lock z If locked via the central locking system, the vehicle automatically if the electronic the doors can also be opened by pulling key is outside the reception range of the the inside door handles. The central vehicle (more than 1 metre away from the vehicle). Picture no: 17046t.tif locking system is also unlocked at this Operating the windows 3 from the time (not possible on Astra TwinTop z When using the Open&Start system 3, outside when the roof is open). there must not be an electronic key z Locked doors unlock automatically in inside the vehicle when locking. 9 Warning the event of an accident of a certain z The locking sensors in the door handles severity (to allow external help to gain must be kept clean to ensure Take care when operating the electrically access). The hazard warning lights and unrestricted functionality of the operated door windows. Risk of injury, courtesy light also come on. For this to Open&Start system 3. particularly to children. occur, the key must be in the starter Vehicle passengers must be informed switch. accordingly. Keep a close watch on the windows when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move.

The windows of vehicles with electrically operated windows in all doors 3 can also be opened or closed from outside:

6 80 Keys, doors, bonnet

Overload The power supply is cut off for a brief period if the central locking system is repeatedly operated at short intervals. The system is protected by a fuse in the fusebox – see page 261. Further information on windows with electric drive – see page 143.

Picture no: 17034t.tif Picture no: 17047t.tif Radio frequency remote control with Fault when locking or unlocking mechanical key Fault in radio frequency remote control or Hold button q or p on the remote control Open&Start system depressed until all windows have opened To unlock or completely closed. Turn key or emergency key for Open&Start Open&Start system with electronic key 3 system (see page 73) towards front of Hold down button q of remote control to vehicle in the driver’s door lock as far as it open. To close, hold down button p or will go. Return key to a vertical position and touch sensor in door handle for longer. The remove. The entire vehicle is unlocked electronic key must be recognised within when the driver’s door is opened. the external reception range. It is advisable for the driver to keep the electronic key on his person. Further information on windows – see page 141. Keys, doors, bonnet 81

For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after Luggage compartment opening the driver’s door, press the central To unlock locking switch m in the centre console. The Radio frequency remote control with vehicle will then be unlocked, provided the mechanical key anti-theft locking system is not engaged. Press button q of remote control, the Switch on the ignition to deactivate the luggage compartment is unlocked Vauxhall alarm system 3. Emergency together with the doors and can be opened operation of the Open&Start system – by pulling the button beneath the handle. see page 73. Open&Start system with electronic key 3 To lock The luggage compartment and the doors Open passenger’s door, close driver’s door, can be unlocked and opened by operating press central locking switch m in centre the button beneath the handle if the console. Central locking system locks all electronic key is recognised outside of the doors. Close passenger’s door. Picture no: 17048t.tif vehicle Malfunction in central locking system To lock – or – To unlock Insert the key or emergency key for by pressing button q of the electronic Turn key or emergency key with Open&Start system (see page 73) into the key’s remote control. Open&Start system – see page 73, towards opening above the lock on the inside of the front of vehicle in the driver’s door lock as door and press until the lock audibly far as it will go. Turn key back to a vertical engages. Then close the door. The position and remove. The other doors can procedure must be repeated for each door. be opened by pulling the handle on the The driver’s door can also be locked from inside of the doors (not possible if anti-theft outside using the lock. The unlocked fuel locking system enabled beforehand). The filler flap and tailgate / boot lid cannot be luggage compartment and the fuel filler locked. cap remain locked. To deactivate the Emergency operation of Open&Start anti-theft locking system, switch ignition on system 3, – see page 14. see page 73. 82 Keys, doors, bonnet

Picture no: 16969t.tif Picture no: 17049t.tif Picture no: 17029t.tif To open To close To lock The luggage compartment is opened by There is a handle on the inside of the Radio frequency remote control with operating the button beneath the handle. tailgate for closing the luggage mechanical key p Open luggage compartment compartment. Press button on remote control. Do not operate the button beneath the Open&Start system with electronic key 3 9 Warning handle when closing. Otherwise the Press button p of the electronic key remote luggage compartment will once again be control or touch sensor in handle of one of Do not drive with the tailgate open or unlocked. the front doors. The electronic key must be ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky recognised in the external reception area. objects, since toxic exhaust gas could It is advisable for the driver to keep the penetrate the interior. electronic key on his person.

Fitting of accessories on the tailgate will increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy, the tailgate will then not stay open. Keys, doors, bonnet 83

Vauxhall alarm system 3 monitors z the doors, luggage compartment, bonnet, z the passenger’s compartment, z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z the ignition. 9 Warning

Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot be Picture no: 17043t.tif Picture no: 17044t.tif unlocked from the inside. To activate Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Remote control with mechanical key The doors, the windows and the bonnet All doors, windows, the sunroof 3 and the must be closed. The electronic key must bonnet must be closed. Within 15 seconds be outside of the vehicle. Touch the sensor of locking, press button p on the remote in the door handle of the driver’s or front control again. passenger’s door again no more than If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s 15 seconds after locking door must be opened and closed so that – or – p the Vauxhall alarm system can be press button of the electronic key’s switched on. remote control again. If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the Vauxhall alarm system can be switched on. 84 Keys, doors, bonnet

4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system. LED illuminates. After approx. 10 seconds the system is activated, without monitoring of the passenger’s compartment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes until system is switched off. For Astra TwinTop, passenger’s compartment monitoring is deactivated if the roof is open to prevent false alarms. Light emitting diode (LED) During the first 10 seconds of Vauxhall alarm system activation: z Picture no: 17050t.tif LED illuminated = Test, Picture no: 17051t.tif Activation without monitoring of switch-on delay After the first 10 seconds of Vauxhall alarm passenger’s compartment and vehicle tilt z LED flashes system activation: e.g. if animals are to be left in the vehicle. rapidly = Door, luggage z LED flashes = System 1. Close tailgate and bonnet. compartment, slow switched on bonnet open, 2. Press button b in the roof console. system fault z LED illuminates The LED in button m flashes for approx. 1 second = Switch-off (max. 10 seconds) – see next column. If a system fault occurs, consult a 3. Close doors. workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Keys, doors, bonnet 85

Note Changes to the vehicle interior, such as the use of seat covers, could impair the function of the passenger’s compartment monitoring.

Alarm While the Vauxhall alarm system is switched on the alarm can be triggered: z an acoustic signal (horn) and z a visual signal (hazard warning lights). The number and duration of the alarms are legally established. Picture no: 16968t.tif Picture no: 17032t.tif The alarm is silenced by pressing a button To deactivate Open&Start system with electronic key 3 of the remote control or by switching on the Remote control with mechanical key Pulling a handle or operating the button ignition. The Vauxhall alarm system is Press button q on the remote control beneath the tailgate handle unlocks the deactivated at the same time. – or – vehicle and disarms the Vauxhall alarm switch on the ignition. system if the electronic key has been Alarm siren recognised outside of the vehicle with integrated battery 3 – or – The alarm siren monitors the on-board if button q on the electronic key’s remote voltage network and triggers an alarm if control has been pressed. this network is manipulated (e.g. if the In the event of a fault in the radio vehicle’s battery is disconnected by frequency remote control or the unauthorised persons). The alarm siren has Open&Start system, open the vehicle as its own power supply and is therefore not described on page 80. dependent on the vehicle’s battery. If the alarm is triggered when the driver’s If the vehicle’s battery is to be door is opened, deactivate the Vauxhall disconnected (e.g. for maintenance work), alarm system by switching on the ignition. the alarm siren must be deactivated as follows: switch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s battery within 15 seconds. To switch off alarm siren: Switch ignition on then off. 86 Keys, doors, bonnet

Picture no: 17052t.tif Picture no: 17053t.tif Picture no: 17054t.tif Child safety locks Bonnet The bonnet is held open automatically 3. To open the bonnet, pull the release lever On other model variants, hold the bonnet 9 Warning located on the driver’s side below the open by engaging the support that runs instrument panel. The bonnet will then be across the radiator in the small slot on the Use the child safety lock whenever unlocked and will partially open. Return underside of the bonnet. children are occupying the rear seats. release lever to its original position. Disregard may lead to injuries or Press the support firmly into place in its endanger life. Vehicle passengers must There is a safety catch on the underside of retainer before closing the bonnet. the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the be informed accordingly. Lower the bonnet and allow it to drop into bonnet. its catch. Using key or screwdriver, turn knob on rear When the bonnet is opened, snow or dirt on Check that the bonnet is locked in position door lock from the vertical position: door the bonnet can slide down and obstruct the by pulling at its front edge. If it is not cannot be opened from inside. air intake. Air intake – see page 173. engaged, repeat the procedure. Seats, Interior 87

Push front passenger’s seat as far back as Seats, Interior possible. Head restraints ...... 88 The seat backrests must not be tilted Armrest 3 by driver’s seat ...... 89 too far back (recommended maximum Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 ...... 90 tilting angle approx. 25°). Armrest 3 in the rear backrest ...... 90 Luggage compartment enlargement, 9 Warning Hatchback ...... 91 Do not sit nearer than 10 inches (25 cm) Luggage compartment enlargement, from the steering wheel, to permit safe Estate without adjustable rear row airbag deployment. of seats ...... 92 Luggage compartment enlargement, Failure to observe the descriptions could Estate with adjustable rear row of lead to injuries which could be fatal. seats...... 94 Picture no: 17350t.tif Vehicle passengers must be informed Extending the luggage compartment, Front seat adjustment accordingly before starting-off. Astra TwinTop...... 96 see pages 3, 4. Folding down the front passenger’s seat 3...... 97 Seating position Luggage compartment cover ...... 97 Adjust driver’s seat such that with the Safety net 3, Estate...... 99 driver sitting upright the steering wheel is Rails and hooks in the luggage held in the area of its upper spokes with the compartment 3, Estate ...... 100 driver’s arms slightly bent. FlexOrganizer 3, Estate ...... 101 Lashing eyes 3 ...... 102 Cargo box 3...... 102 Luggage compartment blind, Astra TwinTop...... 102 Easy Load...... 103 Notes on loading the vehicle...... 104 Cigarette lighter 3...... 105 Accessory socket 3...... 106 Ashtray 3 ...... 106 Foldaway tables 3 ...... 107 Stowage compartments...... 108 Sunvisors...... 108 88 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17055t.tif Picture no: 16976t.tif Picture no: 18019t.tif Head restraints To adjust front seat head restraints To adjust the centre rear head restraint 3, The middle of the head restraint should (all model variants) and outboard rear Hatchback and Estate be at eye level. If this is not possible for head restraints, To adjust, pull the head restraint up or extremely tall persons, set to highest Hatchback and Estate press the catch to release. Then push the position, and set to lowest position for To adjust, press button on side and adjust head restraint down. small persons. height. To fold down the backrest (see page 91) or To fold down the backrests (see page 91) improve visibility when the centre rear seat 9 Warning or improve visibility when the rear seats are is not occupied, remove the head restraint not occupied, remove the head restraints or push it all the way down. Failure to observe the descriptions can or push them all the way down. lead to injuries which could be fatal. If seat is occupied, pull head restraint Vehicle passengers must be informed If seats are occupied, pull head restraints upwards. accordingly before moving away. upwards.

6 Removal - see page 89. Seats, Interior 89

Picture no: 17983t.tif Picture no: 17056t.tif Picture no: 17058t.tif To adjust the rear head restraints 3, Removing the head restraints Armrest 3 by driver’s seat Astra TwinTop Press and release the two catches. Pull and Push raised armrest backward against To adjust, pull the head restraint up or remove the head restraint. resistance and fold down. press the two catches to release. Then push To fold down the backrests 3 the head restraint down. The armrest can be moved to different (see page 91), push the rear head positions in stages by lifting it. To improve visibility when the rear seats restraints all the way down or remove. are not occupied, push the head restraints all the way down. If seats are occupied, pull head restraints upwards. Do not place any objects on the cover behind the head restraints or between the head restraints and the anti-roll bars 3. 90 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17059t.tif Picture no: 17060t.tif Picture no: 17982t.tif Adjusting the rear row of seats 3 Armrest 3 in the rear backrest Astra TwinTop Pull the handle below the seat the slide the Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap Pull the armrest by the strap, pivot it down seat bench to the desired position. obliquely down (45°). and position on the seat with the flat side up. Release the handle and engage the seat When the centre rear seat is in use or the bench. rear backrests are folded, fold the armrest The armrest is held in place on the backrest up. with a retaining strap. To fully remove the armrest, disengage the bracket at the A flap located behind the armrest retaining strap. facilitates transport of long, narrow objects – see page 95. A flap located behind the armrest facilitates transport of long, narrow objects – see page 96. Seats, Interior 91

Picture no: 17061t.tif Picture no: 17062t.tif Picture no: 17063t.tif Luggage compartment Fold down centre backrest 3 Restoring backrest to an upright position enlargement, Push head restraint all the way down – Guide the seat belt through the side Hatchback see page 88. bracket to protect against damage. Folding the backrest Disengage backrest using handle and fold Restore the backrest to an upright position Pushing rear head restraints all the way onto seat cushion. and audibly engage. down or remove – see page 88. Folding down the centre seat backrest The three-point seat belt for the centre rear Slide front seat forward slightly. makes it possible to load longer objects. seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel The outer seats can still be used for if the backrest is properly engaged. Disengage the backrest (single or split 3) occupants. using the pushbutton and fold it down onto Notes on loading the seat cushion. 9 Warning see page 104. Return front seat to desired position. The load must not hinder handbrake operation or gearshifting. 92 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17064t.tif Picture no: 17065t.tif Picture no: 17066t.tif Luggage compartment Raise the seat cushion and fold the Remove the outer rear head restraints. enlargement, backrest Push the centre head restraint all the way Estate without adjustable rear Pull the strap on the seat cushion and lift down – see page 88. row of seats the backrest forwards (single or split). Stow the removed head restraints in the Fold the backrest onto the seat cushion Detach the hooks of the luggage cavity below the raised seat cushions. Push the rear head restraints all the way compartment cover from the head down or remove – see page 88. Detach the restraints – see page 98. hooks of the luggage compartment cover from the head restraints – see page 98. Slide front seat forward slightly. Disengage the backrest (single or split) using the pushbutton and fold it down onto the seat cushion. Return front seat to desired position. Seats, Interior 93

Picture no: 17067t.tif Picture no: 17062t.tif Picture no: 17068t.tif Disengage the backrest (single or split) Fold down centre backrest 3 Restoring the backrests or seat using the pushbutton, fold it forward and Push head restraint all the way down – cushions 3 to their original position engage. see page 88. Guide the seat belt through the side Disengage backrest using handle and fold bracket to protect against damage. onto seat cushion. If the seat cushion is To restore the backrest to an upright raised, fold it forward until it engages. position, fold up, pressing the button on Folding the centre seat backrest makes it the backrest. Audibly engage the backrest possible to load longer objects. The outer in an upright position. seats can still be used for occupants. 9 Warning

The load must not hinder handbrake operation or gearshifting. 94 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17069t.tif Picture no: 17070t.tif Picture no: 17071t.tif Raised seat cushions: insert and adjust Luggage compartment Raise the seat cushion and fold the head restraints in backrests – enlargement, backrest see pages 5, 88. Fold back seat cushions, Estate with adjustable rear row of Lift rear seat cushions forward, single or making sure the belt buckles are properly seats split. positioned. Fold backrests onto seat cushions Detach the hooks of the luggage Attach the hooks of the luggage Push the rear head restraints all the way compartment cover from the head compartment cover to the head restraints – down or remove – see page 88. Detach the restraints – see page 98. see page 98. hooks of the luggage compartment cover The three-point seat belt for the centre rear from the head restraints – see page 98. seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel Slide front seat forward slightly. if the backrest is properly engaged. Disengage the backrest (single or split) Safety net 3, using the sliders and fold it down onto the see page 99. seat cushion. Notes on loading, Return front seat to desired position. see page 104. Seats, Interior 95

Picture no: 17072t.tif Picture no: 17073t.tif Picture no: 17074t.tif Remove the outer rear head restraints. Disengage the backrest (single or split) Loading option behind the armrest in the Push the centre head restraint all the using the sliders, fold it forward and rear seat backrest 3 way down – see page 88. engage. Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap Stow the removed head restraints in the obliquely down (i.e. at an angle of 45°). cavity below the raised seat cushions. Pull the handle and fold down the cover. Folding down the cover makes it possible to load long, narrow objects. The outer seats can still be used for occupants. 9 Warning

The load must not hinder handbrake operation or gearshifting.

To restore, fold the armrest back in position. 96 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17068t.tif Picture no: 17075t.tif Picture no: 18020t.tif Restoring the backrests or seat Raised seat cushions: insert and adjust Extending the luggage cushions 3 to their original position head restraints in backrests – compartment, Guide the seat belts through the side see pages 5, 88. Fold back seat cushions, Astra TwinTop brackets to protect against damage. making sure the belt buckles are properly Loading area between rear seats positioned. To restore the backrest to an upright Pull out the armrest by the strap. position, fold up, disengaging the backrest Attach the hooks of the luggage The armrest is held in place on the backrest at the sliders. Audibly engage the backrest compartment cover to the head restraints – with a retaining strap. To fully remove the in an upright position. see page 98. armrest, disengage the bracket at the The three-point seat belt for the centre rear retaining strap. seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel Pull the handle and fold down the cover. if the backrest is properly engaged. Safety net 3, 9 Warning see page 99. Notes on loading, The load must not hinder handbrake see page 104. operation or gearshifting. Seats, Interior 97

Picture no: 17984t.tif Picture no: 17076t.tif Picture no: 17077t.tif Cover behind armrest can be locked from Folding down the front Luggage compartment cover luggage compartment 3: turn handle 90°: passenger’s seat 3 Hatchback Locked = Handle horizontal Push front passenger’s seat head restraint To remove, unhook the retaining straps Unlocked = Handle vertical all the way down or remove – from the tailgate. Notes on loading, see pages 5, 88. Pull cover from the side guides. see page 104. Push front passenger’s seat back. Fit in reverse order. Fold front passenger’s seat forward by raising release lever. To restore, press the release lever forward, restore the front seat backrest to an upright position and audibly engage. 98 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17078t.tif Picture no: 17079t.tif Picture no: 17080t.tif Estate To cover the gap between the luggage Removing To open compartment cover and the rear Open the luggage compartment cover and Press handle on luggage compartment backrests, there is a cover on the cartridge. detach the hooks from the head restraints. cover down. The cover automatically Attach the two hooks of the cover to the Move release lever on right side of luggage unrolls. head restraint guide rods. If the safety net compartment cover upward. Lift right To close is mounted, run the hooks through the net cover and remove from brackets. mesh. Press handle on luggage compartment Fitting cover rearwards; the cover automatically Insert the luggage compartment cover in engages in its end position. the recess on the left, press the release Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged lever on the right side upward, insert the objects on the cover. cover in the recess on the right, engage and press the lever down. Attach the hooks on the head restraints – see Fig. 17079 T. Seats, Interior 99

Picture no: 17081t.tif Picture no: 17082t.tif Picture no: 17083t.tif Safety net 3, Fixed rear row of seats: extend the safety Fitting behind front seats Estate net straps by adjusting the strap at the Raise the rear seat cushions – The safety net can be mounted behind the upper fastener in the loop of the strap see pages 92 and 94. rear seats or, if the rear seat backrests are (see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the Unroll the safety net. eyelets in the floor on the right and left. folded and the seat cushions raised, There are two brackets in the roof frame 3 behind the front seats. Adjustable rear row of seats : extend the above the front seats. Hook the net rods Fitting behind the rear seats safety net straps by adjusting the strap at into the brackets on one side and then the Remove the luggage compartment cover – the upper fastener in the loop of the strap other. Slide forward to engage. see left column. (see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the eyelets on the back of the right and left Fixed rear row of seats: extend the safety Unroll the safety net. rear seat backrest. net straps by adjusting the strap at the There are two brackets in the roof frame. upper fastener in the loop of the strap Install the luggage compartment cover – (see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the Hook the net rods into the brackets on one see left column. side and then the other. Slide forward to eyelets in the floor on the right and left. engage. 100 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17084t.tif Picture no: 17085t.tif Picture no: 17086t.tif Adjustable rear row of seats 3: extend the Removing Rails and hooks in the luggage safety net straps by adjusting the strap at Detach the safety net belt straps by tipping compartment 3, the upper fastener in the loop of the strap up the length adjuster. Estate (see Fig. 17085 T). Attach the straps in the Unhook the safety net rods from the The side walls of the luggage compartment brackets on the right and left raised seat brackets in the roof frame. Roll up the net house two rails. Insert the hooks in the cushions. and secure with a strap. desired position in the rails: insert the hook Remove the outer rear head restraints and in the upper groove on the rail and press in fold the backrests forward – the lower groove. see pages 92 and 94. Pull off the hook to remove. Seats, Interior 101

Picture no: 17087t.tif Picture no: 17088t.tif Picture no: 17089t.tif FlexOrganizer 3, Variable partition net Hooks and mesh pocket Estate Insert an adapter in each rail: fold up Insert the hooks in the desired position in Flexible system for dividing the luggage handle plate, insert adapter in upper and the rails: insert the hook in the upper compartment or securing loads in an lower groove of rails, move to desired groove on the rail and press in the lower Estate. position. To lock the adapter, swivel the groove. The mesh pocket can be hung from handle plate up. Compress the rods of the the hooks. The system consists of partition net slightly and insert in Removing z adapters corresponding openings of the adapter. z variable partition net Press the partition net rods together and The longer rod must be inserted in the remove from the adapters. z mesh pockets for the side walls upper adapter. z hooks in the luggage compartment Adapter: fold open the retainer, release the Components are mounted in the two guide adapter from the lower groove and remove rails in the side walls of the luggage from the upper groove. compartment by means of adapters or Release the hooks from the rails. hooks. 102 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17090t.tif Picture no: 17092t.tif Picture no: 18024t.tif Lashing eyes 3 Cargo box 3 Luggage compartment blind, These enable loads to be secured in Foldable box under the floor cover used to Astra TwinTop position in the luggage compartment using divide the luggage compartment. To open 3 3 lashing straps or a luggage net . The cargo box may only be loaded when Disengage the luggage compartment the backrests are engaged in an upright blind from the recess on the right and left. position. Rolls up automatically. To remove the cargo box floor cover, To close remove first the right half then the left half. Grasp the handle, pull the blind towards For models with towing equipment, first the rear of the vehicle and engage in the release the coupling ball bar fixing strap recess on the right and left. and thread this through the eye – Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged see page 238. Installation in the reverse objects on the blind. order. There must be no objects outside of or on top of the luggage compartment blind when the roof is open or in the process of opening. The roof can only be operated when the luggage compartment blind is closed. Seats, Interior 103

Picture no: 17978t.tif Picture no: 17977t.tif Picture no: 17973t.tif z Do not load the luggage compartment Easy Load 9 Warning (Electrically operated loading aid higher than the load height marking (see Fig. 17973 T). Otherwise, both the for the luggage compartment of roof and the load will be damaged. Take care when operating the loading the Astra TwinTop) aid. Risk of injury. z Detach the luggage compartment blind The loading aid makes it possible to Make sure that nothing could be pinched. comfortably load the luggage from the rear window frame and engage compartment when the roof is open. The it in the recess on the left and right. The Make sure no one is in the action zone press of a button will raise the roof folded blind must be perfectly flat when closed. during operation. Risk of injury. up in the luggage compartment 25 cm. z Briefly press button ,: the folded roof is This is especially important for children. This enlarges the load opening of the lowered. Inform passengers accordingly. luggage compartment. z Close the boot lid. z Open the boot lid. 6 z Unhook the luggage compartment blind and attach it to the rear window frame. z Briefly press button ,: the folded roof is raised. The roof remains in this end position for approx. 9 minutes. 104 Seats, Interior

Note z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when z Do not place objects on or near the transporting objects in the luggage luggage compartment blind. compartment – see page 99. z The folded roof can only be lowered z Estate: close the luggage compartment when the blind is closed. Otherwise, a cover so the rear window does not reflect warning buzzer will sound three times. the objects. z Movement can only be stopped by z If the backrests are not folded down pressing button ,. Holding the button when transporting objects in the depressed will change the direction of luggage compartment, they must be movement. engaged in their upright position 3 – z An acoustic signal sounds to confirm see pages 91, 93, 96. that the roof has reached its upper or z Do not allow the load to protrude above lower end position. Picture no: 17093t.tif the upper edge of the rear seat z Only close the boot lid once the Notes on loading the vehicle backrests, or above the upper edge of the front seat backrests if the rear seat confirmation signal has sounded to z Heavy objects in the luggage backrests 3 are folded down. indicate that the loading aid is in its compartment should be placed against lower end position. the engaged rear seat backrests 3 or, if z Astra TwinTop: note the maximum z Do not touch moving parts. the rear seat backrests are folded down, loading height when the roof is open. against the front seat backrests. If See page 103, Fig. 17973 T. z One minute before the end of the hold objects are to be stacked, the heavier z 3 time for the raised loading aid, a The warning triangle and first-aid kit objects should be placed at the bottom. 3 warning buzzer will sound to remind you (cushion) must always be freely Unsecured objects in the luggage accessible. to lower the roof. compartment would be thrown forward z z The loading aid is only operable when with great force in the event of heavy Do not place any objects in front of the the vehicle is unlocked. braking, for example. rear window or on the instrument panel. They are reflected in the glass, obstruct z Secure heavy objects with lashing the driver’s view and will be thrown straps 3 attached to lashing eyes – through the vehicle, for instance in the see page 102. If heavy loads slip when event of heavy braking. the vehicle is braked heavily or driven z around a bend, the handling of the The load must not hinder handbrake vehicle may change. operation or gearshifting or impair the driver in any way. Seats, Interior 105 z Astra TwinTop: do not place any objects on the cover of the deployable anti-roll bars 3, behind the rear head restraints or in the luggage compartment outside of, on or next to the luggage compartment cover. z Do not place any objects in the deployment area of the airbags and deployable anti-roll bars 3 as this poses a risk of injury should the systems be triggered. z Do not drive with luggage compartment open when transporting bulky objects, for example, since toxic exhaust fumes Picture no: 17094t.tif Picture no: 17095t.tif could penetrate the interior. Cigarette lighter 3 Press in cigarette lighter. Switches off The cigarette lighter is located under the automatically once the element is glowing. z Weights, payload and roof load – Pull out lighter. see page 318. ashtray cover. z Driving with a roof load The cover opens when pressed at the point (see pages 196, 199, 234) increases the indicated. sensitivity of the vehicle to crosswinds and has a detrimental effect on vehicle handling owing to the vehicle’s higher centre of gravity. 9 Warning

Failure to observe these descriptions can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly. 106 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 18023t.tif Picture no: 17096t.tif Picture no: 17094t.tif Accessory socket 3 Estates have an additional accessory Ashtray 3 Some vehicles have an accessory socket for socket 3 in the luggage compartment. To be used only for ash and not for the connection of electrical accessories Do not damage the sockets by using combustible rubbish. instead of a cigarette lighter. Use of the unsuitable plugs. accessory socket while the engine is not 9 Warning The maximum power consumption of running will discharge the battery. electrical accessories must not exceed Failure to observe these descriptions can 120 watts. lead to injuries which may be fatal. Do not connect any current-delivering Vehicle passengers must be informed accessories, e.g. electrical charging accordingly. devices or batteries. Ashtray front Electrical accessories connected to the The cover opens when pressed at the point socket must comply with the electro- indicated. magnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur. Seats, Interior 107

Picture no: 17097t.tif Picture no: 17098t.tif Picture no: 17099t.tif To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray Rear ashtray 3 To empty, open the ashtray, press the insert at the spots illustrated and pull In the rear centre console. spring (arrow) and pull the ashtray straight upwards. Pull out the ashtray by pushing on one of out rearwards. the sides. Foldaway tables 3 On the front seat backrests. Open by pulling upward until it engages. Fold away by pressing down past the resistance point. Do not place any heavy objects on the table. 108 Seats, Interior

Picture no: 17101t.tif Picture no: 17103t.tif Picture no: 17102t.tif Stowage compartments Stowage compartment in front armrest 3 Stowage compartment for glasses 3 Glove compartment To open, press button and open upper part On driver’s side: fold down to open. To open, pull handle upwards. of armrest. Do not store heavy objects in the stowage The glove compartment shelf 3 can be compartment. removed: disengage the shelf by pulling on the front edge. Sunvisors Use the sunvisor to protect from glare Refit the shelf by sliding it into the side by pulling it down and swivelling it to the guide strips and engage it in the rear panel side 3. by pushing. On vehicles with panoramic windscreen 3, The front of the open cover houses a pen close the sunvisors before moving the roof holder and a coin compartment. lining. Cooled glove compartment 3 – see page 155. Safety systems 109 Safety systems Three-stage safety system Comprising: 9 Warning z three-point seat belts, The airbag systems and anti-roll bars 3 z belt tensioners at the front seats, serve to supplement the three-point seat belts and belt tensioners. The seat belts z Seat belts...... 110 airbag systems for the driver, must therefore always be worn. front passenger and outboard rear Three-point seat belts ...... 110 Disregard of these instructions could lead seats 3; for TwinTop 3, anti-roll bars to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle Testing the belts ...... 111 behind the backrests. Belt tensioners...... 111 passengers must be informed accordingly. Using the belts ...... 113 The three stages are activated in sequence depending on the severity of the accident: Vauxhall Full-size airbag system ...... 115 Read the instructions supplied with the 3 z The automatic seat belt locking devices Mounting brackets for child restraint system! ISO-FIX child restraint systems ...... 127 prevent the belt strap from being pulled Child restraint system 3...... 128 out and thus ensure that the vehicle Rollover protection system 3...... 130 occupants are retained in their seats. Exterior mirrors...... 132 z The front seat belt buckles are pulled Aspherical exterior mirror 3 ...... 132 downwards. As a result, the seat belts Automatic anti-dazzle interior are instantaneously tightened and the mirror 3...... 132 occupants are made aware of the Sunvisors, glove compartment ...... 132 deceleration of the vehicle at a very early stage. This reduces the stress placed on Hazard warning lights...... 132 the body. Head restraints ...... 133 Safety accessories 3 ...... 133 z In the event of a severe accident, the airbag systems and deployable anti-roll bars 3 also deploy, forming safety cushions for the occupants. The front airbags are inflated in two stages based on the severity of the collision. 110 Safety systems

Seat belts Seat belts are only intended for one person. They are not suitable for anyone under 9 Warning 12 years of age or under 150 cm tall. For children up to 12 years of age, we Always wear your seat belt, and that recommend the Vauxhall child restraint means also in urban traffic and when you system – see page 128. are a rear seat passenger. It can save your life! Pregnant women must always wear a seat belt – see page 113.

In the event of an accident, persons not wearing seat belts endanger their fellow occupants and themselves. Picture no: 16981t.tif Control indicator X 3 for the seat belt – Three-point seat belts see page 38. The vehicle is equipped with three-point seat belts with automatic retractors and locking devices, allowing freedom of body movement although the spring tensioned belts always ensure a snug fit. For information on correct seating position – see pages 87, 113, 117. The belt has a "vehicle sensitive retractor" which is designed to lock during heavy acceleration or deceleration in any direction. Safety systems 111

Testing the belts Actuation of belt tensioners Please check all parts of the belt system Indicated by illumination of control occasionally for damage and correct indicator v - see next page. operation. Have damaged parts replaced. The belt tensioners must be replaced after In case of an accident, please replace activation. We recommend that you overstretched belts and triggered belt consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. tensioners. We recommend that you If the seat belts are undamaged the consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. operation thereof is unaffected, even if the Do not perform any alterations on the belt tensioners have been triggered. belts, their anchorages, the automatic Important information – see page 112. retractors or the belt buckles. Make sure that belts are not damaged or trapped by sharp-edged objects. Picture no: 17104t.tif Belt tensioners The front seat belt systems are equipped with belt tensioners. In the event of a head- on or rear-end collision of a certain severity, the belt buckles are pulled down, thus tightening the belts. 112 Safety systems

z The belt tensioner and airbag system 9 Warning control electronics can be found in the centre console area. In order to avoid Have the cause of the fault remedied. We malfunctions, do not store magnetic recommend that you consult your objects in this area. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z We recommend that you have the front The system’s integrated self-diagnostics seats removed by a Vauxhall Authorised allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have Repairer in the event of actuation of the your Car Pass to hand when consulting a belt tensioners. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. z The belt tensioners only actuate once. Important Please replace belt tensioners that have been triggered. We recommend that you z Accessories and other objects not consult your Vauxhall Authorised specifically approved for your vehicle Picture no: 17105t.tif Repairer. Control indicator v for belt tensioners type must not be affixed or placed within The belt tensioners are electronic the action zone of the belt tensioners z Applicable safety directives must always monitored together with the airbag (near the belt buckles) as this could be observed when disposing of the systems and the deployable anti-roll result in injury if the belt tensioners are vehicle. For this reason, disposal should bars 3. Their operational readiness is triggered. be performed by an authorised recycling company. We recommend that you indicated by control indicator v on the z Do not make any modifications to the consult your Vauxhall Authorised instrument panel. When the ignition is components of the belt tensioners, as Repairer. switched on, the control indicator v this will render the vehicle unroadworthy. illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 9 Warning 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the belt tensioner system, Improper handling (e.g. removal or airbag systems or the deployable anti-roll installation) can activate the belt bars 3 - see page 121. The belt tensioners, tensioners – risk of injury. airbag systems or deployable anti-roll bars 3 may fail to trigger in the event of an accident. Deployment of the belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of v. Safety systems 113

Picture no: 17106t.tif Picture no: 17107t.tif Picture no: 17108t.tif Height adjustment 3 Using the belts 9 Warning Fitting seat belts of front seat belt upper anchorage point: Pull the belt out of the retractor and guide On pregnant women in particular, the 1. Pull belt out slightly. it across the body, making certain that it is lap belt must be positioned as low as 2. Press down button on adjuster slide. not twisted. possible across the pelvis so as not to 3. Move adjuster slide up or down. Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The put too much pressure on the abdomen. front seat backrest must not be tilted back 4. Allow sliding adjuster to audibly latch. Bulky clothing prevents the belt from fitting too far or the seat belt will not operate Do not adjust height while driving. properly. The recommended angle of properly. The belt must not rest against hard or fragile objects in the pockets of inclination is 25°. Make sure that the lap 6 belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pens, keys, across the body. Tension the belt spectacles) because these could cause frequently while driving by tugging the injury. Do not place any objects (e.g. diagonal part of the belt. handbags, mobile phones) between the belt and your body. 114 Safety systems

Three-point seat belts on rear outer seats When not in use, pass seat belts through side holders 3 as shown in Fig. 17063 T on page 91. Three-point seat belt of centre rear seat 3 The belt can only be pulled from the inertia reel when the backrests are upright and properly engaged – see page 91. Three-point seat belts of rear seats in Astra TwinTop In order to prevent the flutter noise caused by the belts when the roof and windows are open, the seat belts can be secured behind Picture no: 16981t.tif Picture no: 17109t.tif the cushion hatch when the rear seats are Adjust height such that the belt passes Removing the belt not occupied. over the wearer’s shoulder and rests To remove the belt, depress the red against the shoulder. It must not pass pushbutton on the buckle; the belt will over the neck or upper arm. retract automatically. Safety systems 115

Picture no: 17009t.tif Picture no: 17110t.tif Picture no: 17351t.tif Vauxhall Full-size airbag system Side airbag system Curtain airbag system 3 The Vauxhall Full-size airbag system The side airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain airbag system triggers in case comprises several individual systems. a side-on collision to form a safety cushion of a side-on collision and provides a safety for the driver or front passenger in the barrier in the head area on the respective Front airbag system respective door area. This substantially side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upper body injury to the head considerably in case of a the event of a serious accident involving a and pelvis. side-on collision. frontal impact and forms safety cushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the driver and front passenger is checked and the risk of injuries to the upper body and head thereby substantially reduced. 116 Safety systems

Exception: Front passenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags on the passenger’s side if the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 122. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 128. Picture no: 17111t.tif Picture no: 17112t.tif Examples of events triggering the front Vauxhall Full-size airbag system z seat occupancy recognition 3, airbag system: Front airbag z the control indicator for Vauxhall child z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle: The front airbag system is identified by the restraint systems y with transponders 3 the front airbags are triggered at low word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and in the instrument panel. vehicle speed. above the glove compartment. The front airbag system will be triggered: z Impact against a yielding obstacle (such as another vehicle): the front airbags are The front airbag system comprises: z depending on the severity of the only triggered at a higher vehicle speed. z an airbag with inflator in the steering accident, wheel and a second one in the z depending on the type of impact, instrument panel, z within the range shown in the illustration, z control electronics with impact sensors, z independent of side airbag and curtain z the airbag systems control indicator v in airbag system 3. the instrument panel, Safety systems 117

Picture no: 17009t.tif Picture no: 17350t.tif Picture no: 16981t.tif When triggered, the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion 9 Warning 9 Warning for the driver and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat The front airbag system provides The three-point seat belt must be occupants is checked, thereby optimum protection when the seat, correctly fitted – see page 113. substantially reducing the risk of injury backrest and head restraint are correctly The front airbag system will not be to the upper body and head. adjusted: adjust the driver’s seat according to the occupant’s height such triggered in the event of No impairment of view will occur, because that with the driver sitting upright the z the ignition being switched off, the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly. steering wheel is held in the area of its z minor frontal collisions, upper spokes with the driver’s arms z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, slightly bent. The passenger’s seat should z collisions involving a side or rear-impact be as far back as possible, with the that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to backrest upright – see pages 3, 87. Do the occupants. not place the head, body, hands or feet on the covers of the airbag systems. Do not place any objects in the area in which the airbags inflate. Important information – see page 124. 118 Safety systems

9 Warning

Seat belts must therefore always be worn. The front airbag system serves to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not wear your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or even thrown from the vehicle, in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident the belt helps to keep you in the correct seating position, so that the front airbag system can provide you with effective protection. Picture no: 17113t.tif Picture no: 17114t.tif Side airbags The side airbag system will be triggered: In addition, the front airbag system will not The side airbag system is identified by the z be triggered for the front passenger in depending on the severity of the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the accident, model variants with seat occupancy front seat backrests. recognition 3 if z depending on the type of impact, The side airbag system comprises: z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied, z within the range shown in the illustration z an airbag with inflator in the back of the z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or driver’s and front passenger’s seat front passenger’s side, restraint system with transponders 3. respectively, Seat occupancy recognition – z independently of the front airbag z see page 122. Vauxhall child restraint the control electronics, system. system with transponders 3 – z the side-impact sensors, Exception: see page 128. z the airbag systems control indicator v in Front passenger’s seat with seat the instrument panel, occupancy recognition system 3. The seat z seat occupancy recognition 3, occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags on the z the control indicator for Vauxhall child passenger’s side if the front passenger’s restraint systems y with transponders 3 seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child in the instrument panel. restraint system with transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat. Seat occupancy recognition – see page 122. Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 – see page 128. Safety systems 119

In addition, the side airbag system will 9 Warning not be triggered for the front passenger in model variants with seat occupancy There must be no objects in the area in recognition 3 if which the airbag inflates or in the area z between the seat backs and the vehicle the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied, body. Do not place the hands or arms on z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child the covers of the airbag systems. restraint system with transponders 3. Important information – see page 124. Seat occupancy recognition – The three-point seat belt must always be see page 122. Vauxhall child restraint 3 correctly fitted – see page 113. system with transponders – see page 128. The side airbags will not be triggered in the Picture no: 17110t.tif event of When triggered, the side airbag inflates z the ignition being switched off, within milliseconds to form a safety cushion z for the driver or front passenger in the frontal collisions, respective door area. This substantially z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, reduces the risk of injury to the upper body z collisions involving a rear-impact, and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision. z collisions involving a side-impact outside the passenger’s cell. 120 Safety systems

Picture no: 17115t.tif Picture no: 17114t.tif Picture no: 17351t.tif Curtain airbag 3 The curtain airbag system will be triggered: When the curtain airbag is triggered it The curtain airbag system is identified by z depending on the severity of the inflates within milliseconds and provides the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. accident, a safety barrier in the head area on the The curtain airbag system comprises: respective side of the vehicle. This reduces z depending on the type of impact, the risk of injury to the head considerably in z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame z within the range shown in the illustration case of a side-impact. on the driver’s and front passenger’s side on the centre door pillar of the driver’s or respectively, front passenger’s side, z the control electronics, z together with the side airbag system, z the side-impact sensors, z irrespective of seat occupancy z the airbag systems control indicator v in recognition, the instrument panel. z independently of the front airbag system. Safety systems 121

9 Warning 9 Warning

There must be no objects in the area in Have the cause of the fault remedied. We which the airbag inflates. Do not place recommend that you consult your the hands or arms on the covers of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. airbag systems. Important information – see page 124. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Have The three-point seat belt must always be your Car Pass to hand when consulting a correctly fitted – see page 113. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

The curtain airbags will not be triggered in the event of z the ignition being switched off, Picture no: 17105t.tif Control indicator v for airbag systems z frontal collisions, The airbag systems are electronic z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, monitored together with seat occupancy recognition 3, the belt tensioners and z collisions involving a rear-impact, the deployable anti-roll bars 3. Their z collisions involving a side-impact outside operational readiness is indicated by the passenger’s cell. control indicator v on the instrument panel. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator v illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go off after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the airbag systems, seat occupancy recognition 3, the belt tensioners or the deployable anti-roll bars 3 - see page 112. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an accident. Deployment of the airbags is indicated by continuous illumination of v. 122 Safety systems

Seat occupancy recognition 3 The seat occupancy recognition system 9 Warning deactivates the front and side airbags for the front passenger if the front passenger’s Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with seat is not occupied or a Vauxhall child transponders 3 can be fitted on the front restraint system with transponders 3 is passenger’s seat. Use of systems without fitted on the front passenger’s seat. The transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. curtain airbag system 3 remains activated. Vauxhall child restraint systems with The control indicator for seat occupancy transponders 3 can be identified recognition y is located in the instrument by a sticker. panel. If control indicator y illuminates Note for approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is On the Astra TwinTop, there may be switched on, the vehicle is equipped with interference in radio reception of certain seat occupancy recognition – Picture no: 17116t.tif frequencies in the medium waveband see next page, Fig. 17117 T. Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition when the roof is open and the front If a Vauxhall child restraint system with are also identified by a sticker on the lower passenger’s seat is unoccupied. transponders 3 is installed, control panel of the front passenger’s seats – see indicator y illuminates once the ignition illustration above. has been switched on and the system has Vauxhall child restraint systems with detected the seat. Only then can a child transponders 3 are automatically restraint system with transponders 3 be detected if correctly fitted to the front used on the front passenger’s seat. passenger’s seat. When this type of child restraint system is in use on the front passenger’s seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat are deactivated. The curtain airbag system remains activated. Pay attention to control indicator y for seat occupancy recognition 3 - see Fig. 17117 T. Safety systems 123

Control indicator y for Vauxhall child If the control indicator y flashes even restraint systems with transponders 3 though there is correctly installed child The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint restraint system with transponders 3, there system with transponders 3 is indicated by is a fault-risk of fatal injury to the child. Fit the illumination of control indicator y in child restraint system to rear seat. Have the instrument panel once the ignition has the cause of the fault remedied. We been switched on and the seat occupancy recommend that you consult your Vauxhall recognition system has detected the child Authorised Repairer. restraint system. If no Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is installed, the control indicator y must neither illuminate nor flash, since this indicates that the front passenger’s airbag systems would not Picture no: 17117t.tif be triggered. Have the cause of fault If the control indicator y does not remedied. We recommend that you consult illuminate whilst driving, the front and side your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. airbag have not been deactivated on the passenger’s side. Risk of fatal injury to the 9 Warning child - fit child restraint system to rear seat. Have cause of fault remedied. We If the Vauxhall child restraint system recommend that you consult your Vauxhall with transponders 3 has been fitted Authorised Repairer. according to the instructions, the control indicator y for Vauxhall restraint If the child restraint system is not correctly systems with transponders must installed or the transponder is faulty, the illuminate in the instrument panel when y control indicator flashes. Check for the ignition is switched on. correct installation of child restraint system. To install the child restraint system If the control indicator y does not with transponders 3, see the instructions illuminate whilst driving, the airbag enclosed with the system. systems have not been deactivated on the passenger’s side. Risk of fatal injury. In this case, fit child restraint system to rear seat. Have cause of fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 124 Safety systems

Important z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to z The speeds, directions of movement and z Do not affix or place accessories or other clean the steering wheel, instrument deformation properties of the vehicles, objects in the deployment area or the panel, front seat backrests, roof frame and the properties of the obstacle airbag systems or deployable anti-roll and seat cushion of the front concerned, determine the severity of the bars 3 as this could result in injuries if the passenger’s seat. Do not use any accident and triggering of the airbags. components are triggered. aggressive cleaning agents. The degree of damage to your vehicle z and the resulting repair costs alone are z Do not place any objects between the Only protective covers which are approved for your Astra with side airbag not indicative that the criteria for airbag systems / anti-roll bar covers 3 triggering of the airbags were met. and the occupants. Risk of injury. system may be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective covers, make z Do not make any modifications to z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to sure that the airbag units on the components of the airbag systems or the hang up light articles of clothing or coat outboard sides of the front seat anti-roll bars 3 as this would render the hangers. Do not place any objects in the backrests are not covered. vehicle unroadworthy. pockets of the hanging items – risk of z injury. The airbag systems are triggered independently of each other based on 9 Warning z The control electronics of the airbag the severity of the accident and the type The systems can be triggered abruptly systems, belt tensioners and deployable of impact. The side airbag system and and cause injury if they are handled anti-roll bars 3 are located in the centre the curtain airbag system 3 are improperly. console area. Do not store any magnetic triggered together. objects in the area as they could cause z z malfunction. Astra TwinTop: the deployable anti-roll We recommend having the steering bars 3 are deployed together with the wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling z Do not bond or use other materials to front and side airbag systems parts, the door seals, the handles and cover the steering wheel, instrument depending on the severity of the impact. the seats removed by your Vauxhall panel, front seat backrests and roof z Authorised Repairer. frame, in the area of the airbags, the Each airbag or deployable anti-roll 3 z passenger’s seat cushion or the covers of bar can only be deployed once. Applicable safety directives must always the deployable anti-roll bars 3. Have deployed components replaced be observed when disposing of the immediately. We recommend that you vehicle. For this reason, disposal should consult your Vauxhall Authorised be performed by an authorised recycling Repairer. company. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Safety systems 125 z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should z In order to prevent malfunctions when only travel on the rear seats. This does using a Vauxhall child restraint system not apply to children who are travelling with transponders 3 on the front in child restraint systems with passenger’s seat, no objects (e.g. plastic transponders 3. sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be z In vehicles with seat occupancy placed under the child restraint system. recognition 3, do not place any heavy objects on the front passenger’s seat 9 Warning otherwise the airbag systems for the Child restraint systems as well as other front passenger’s seat may be triggered objects must never be carried on the in the event of an accident. lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If z In vehicles with seat occupancy carried in this way, child restraint systems recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat do not use protective covers or seat occupancy recognition 3 could lead to Picture no: 17118t.tif 3 cushions on the front passenger’s seat. front passenger’s airbag systems not Use of child restraint systems on the being triggered in the event of an front passenger’s seat in vehicles with accident. airbag systems, but without seat occupancy recognition 3 9 Warning

No child restraint system 3 may be installed on front passenger’s seat. Danger to life.

Model variants with front passenger’s airbag can be identified by the word AIRBAG over the glove compartment and the warning sticker on the side of the instrument panel, visible when the passenger’s door is open – see illustration.

6 126 Safety systems

Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition are identified by a sticker on the lower panel of the front passenger’s seat – see Fig. 17116 T.

Picture no: 17119t.tif Picture no: 17116t.tif The side airbag system is identified by the Use of child restraint systems 3 on front word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the passenger’s seat in vehicles with airbag front seat backrests. systems and seat occupancy 3 Seat occupancy recognition 3 – recognition see page 122. 9 Warning

Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 can be fitted on the front passenger’s seats. Use of systems without transponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Safety systems 127

Picture no: 17117t.tif Picture no: 17424t.tif Picture no: 17091t.tif Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition Vauxhall child restraint systems with Mounting brackets 3 for can also be identified by control transponders 3 can be identified by a ISO-FIX child restraint systems indicator y in the instrument panel. If sticker on the child restraint system – y The brackets located between the backrest control indicator illuminates for approx. see illustration. and seat cushion are used for mounting 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, ISO-FIX child restraint systems. the vehicle is equipped with seat occupancy recognition – see page 122. The instructions accompanying the ISO-FIX child restraint system are to be expressly The seat occupancy recognition system followed. detects Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 and deactivates the Only ISO-FIX child restraint systems front and side airbag systems for the front approved for the vehicle may be used. passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag We recommend that you consult your system remains activated. For seat Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. occupancy recognition – see page 122. 128 Safety systems

3 Child restraint system Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat1) The Vauxhall child restraint system is designed specifically for your Vauxhall and Weight and age On front On On thus provides optimum safety for your child class2) passenger’s seat outer rear seats centre rear seat3) in the event of impact. If a different child safety seat is used, follow the 0: manufacturers’ instructions for fitting and up to 10 kg B1, + U, + U use. or approx. 10 months Selecting the right system Your child should be transported facing 0+: rearward in the vehicle as long as possible. up to 13 kg B1, + U, + U Change the system when the height of the or approx. child is such that the head extends over the 2 years top of the system and is no longer supported at eye level. The child’s neck I: area is still very weak. In the event of an 9 to 18 kg B2, + U, + U accident, they are subjected to less stress in or approx. the semi-prone rearward position than 8 months to 4 years when upright. II: 15 to 25 kg –U U or approx. 3 to 7 years III: 22 to 36 kg –U U or approx. 6 to 12 years

1) For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child safety seat be installed on one of the outer rear seats. 2) We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit. 3) Not on Astra TwinTop. Safety systems 129

B1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy U = Universal suitability in conjunction Note recognition and Vauxhall child with three-point seat belt. z Children under 12 years or under 150 cm restraint system with transponders. + = Vehicle seat with ISO-FIX mounting tall should only travel in an appropriate If the child restraint system is being available. When mounting with child safety seat. secured using a three-point seat ISO-FIX, only ISO-FIX child restraint z When transporting children, use the child belt, move seat height adjustment 3 systems that have been approved restraint systems suitable for the child’s to uppermost position. Move front for the vehicle may be used. We weight. passenger’s seat as far back as recommend your Vauxhall z Ensure correct installation of child possible and move front Authorised Repairer. restraint system, see the instructions passenger’s seat belt anchorage – = No child restraint system permitted enclosed with the system. point to lowest position. in this weight class. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint B2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy system can be wiped clean. recognition and Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders. z Do not stick anything on the child restraint systems and do not cover them If the child restraint system is being with any other materials. secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 z Only allow the child to enter and exit on to uppermost position. Move front the side of the vehicle facing away from passenger’s seat as far back as the road. possible so that vehicle safety belt z A child restraint system which has been runs from anchorage point towards subjected to stress in an accident must the front. be replaced. 130 Safety systems

Rollover protection system 3 The Astra TwinTop is equipped with rollover protection with reinforced windscreen frame and anti-roll bars behind the rear seat head restraints. Depending on the model variant, the anti-roll bars are either fixed or deploy automatically in the event of an impact of a certain severity. The subsequent description only regards the model variant with automatically deployed anti-roll bars 3.

Picture no: 17974t.tif Picture no: 17105t.tif In the event of a rollover, the anti-roll bars Control indicator v for anti-roll bars deploy upwards in a matter of The deployable anti-roll bars are milliseconds. They also deploy together monitored electronically together with the with the front and side airbag systems, belt tensioners and the airbag systems. helping to optimise occupant protection. Their operational readiness is indicated by v The system deploys whether the roof is control indicator in the instrument panel. open or closed. Roof operation is not When the ignition is switched on, the v possible if the anti-roll bars are extended. control indicator illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go out after 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in or deployment of the anti-roll bars, belt tensioners and airbag systems – see page 112. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an accident. Deployment of the anti-roll bars is indicated by continuous illumination of v. Safety systems 131

Have the cause of the fault remedied. We Note recommend that you consult your Vauxhall z Do not place any objects on the covers of Authorised Repairer. the anti-roll bars behind the head restraints. They would be propelled 9 Warning through the vehicle in an uncontrolled fashion should the anti-roll bars deploy. The roof cannot be closed or opened if Such objects could also prevent the anti- the anti-roll bars are extended. The anti- roll bars from extending. roll bars must first be retracted. z Do not operate the roof while the anti- If an attempt is made to operate the roof roll bars are extended. Parts of the roof while the anti-roll bars are extended, a could be damaged during such continuous signal will sound as a operation. warning. z Deployment of the anti-roll bars is Picture no: 17992t.tif indicated by illumination of control Extended anti-roll bars indicator v. Can be retracted (e.g. in order to close the roof after a collision). z Manually retracted anti-roll bars will not deploy in the event of a collision. Press the lever between the rods of an anti- roll bar to unlock the system. Push the anti- z After deployment, the anti-roll bar roll bar all the way down until it engaged. system must be serviced immediately. Fit the cover. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Repeat the procedure on the other anti-roll bar. Control indicator v, however, will remain illuminated and the anti-roll bars will not deploy in the event of another collision. 132 Safety systems

Picture no: 17120t.tif Picture no: 17121t.tif Picture no: 16991t.tif Exterior mirrors Automatic anti-dazzle interior Hazard warning lights For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior mirror 3 If the airbags are triggered, the hazard mirrors will swing out of their normal Dazzle at night is automatically reduced. warning lights are automatically activated mounting position if they are bumped with and the central locking system unlocks all With the ignition off, the mirror does not sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by doors. Press button ¨ twice to switch off dim. applying slight pressure to the mirror the hazard warning lights. housing. Setting – see page 6. Aspherical exterior mirror 3 Sunvisors, glove compartment Increases the field of view. Estimating the The mirror covers in the sunvisors and the distance away of vehicles following you is glove compartment should be closed whilst only possible to a limited extent because of driving. slight distortion. Safety systems 133

Head restraints Safety accessories 3 Do not mount any object or component on The wide range of Vauxhall accessories the head restraint unless it has been allows you to equip your Astra in specifically released for your Astra for this accordance with your own wishes. In purpose. They impair the protective addition to safety accessories, items for properties of the head restraint and could improving comfort and a complete range be thrown forward through the vehicle in of vehicle care products you will find many the event of heavy braking or an accident. articles which will be of great value to you when needed. "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" guarantee high quality and accurate fit. Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be happy to advise you, for example with Picture no: 17011t.tif Active head restraints 3 regard to: z In the event of a rear-end impact, the Vauxhall child restraint systems z active head restraints automatically tilt Tow ropes z forwards. The head is more effectively Tow rods z supported by the head restraint and the Jump leads z danger of whiplash in the neck area is Spare bulb kit z reduced. Spare fuse kit z Halogen fog lights Active head restraints are identified by z Mudflaps the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint z Warning triangle guide sleeves. z First-aid kit (cushion) 134 Lighting

Model variants with daytime running Lighting lights 3: parking lights are on when the ignition is switched on and the light switch is set to 7 or AUTO. Dipped beam is on when the engine is running. The daytime running lights switch off when Automatic dipped beam activation 3 135 the ignition is switched off. Front fog lights > 3...... 135 Fog tail light r ...... 135 Follow the regulations of the country in Turn signals, hazard warning lights... 135 which you are driving when using daytime running lights and front fog lights 3. Reversing lights...... 135 Headlight range adjustment ?...... 136 Driving abroad – see page 140. Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) .. 137 Door-to-door lighting function ...... 138 Picture no: 17122t.tif Parking lights 3 ...... 138 Exterior lights Instrument illumination, Turn light switch: information display illumination...... 138 7 = Off Courtesy light...... 139 8 = Parking lights Puddle light 3 ...... 140 9 = Dipped beam, main beam Battery discharge protection...... 140 Dipped beam, main beam and headlight Light covers...... 140 flash – see page 15. Headlights when driving abroad ...... 140 In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and number plate lights are also on. Control indicator 8 – see page 39. Lighting 135

Fog tail light r On = Press r, r illuminates in instrument panel Off = Press r again or switch ignition or light off The fog tail light can only be switched on both the ignition and dipped beam / parking lights are on. The vehicle fog tail light are deactivated when towing. Turn signals, Picture no: 17123t.tif Picture no: 17124t.tif hazard warning lights Automatic dipped beam Front fog lights > 3 see page 15. activation 3 On = Press >, > illuminates Light switch to AUTO: dipped beam comes in instrument panel Reversing lights on automatically when the engine is Off = Press > again or Come on when reverse gear is engaged running if outside light conditions warrant switch ignition or light off and ignition is switched on. such. The front fog lights can only be switched on The exterior lights switch off when the when both the ignition and lights are on. ignition is switched off. For reasons of safety, the light switch should always remain in the AUTO position. 136 Lighting

Vehicles without level control system Automatic headlight range adjustment 3 z Front seats occupied = 0 On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the range of the headlights is adjusted z All seats occupied = 1 automatically based on vehicle load. z All seats occupied and luggage compartment load = 2 z Driver’s seat occupied and luggage compartment load = 3

Vehicles with level control system z Front seats occupied = 0 z All seats occupied = 1 Picture no: 17125t.tif z All seats occupied and Headlight range adjustment ? luggage compartment load = 1 Manual headlight range adjustment z Driver’s seat occupied and With dipped beam switched on, adjust luggage compartment load = 2 headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle load. Turn wheel against resistance and click it to the required position. Correct adjustment of the headlight range reduces dazzle for other road users. Automatic Level Control system 3 – see page 216. Lighting 137

Picture no: 17126t.tif Picture no: Picture no: 17127t.tif Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 Curve lighting Control indicator light B (AFL) The Xenon light beam pivots based on Illuminated: fault in system. The system is AFL improves lighting in curves (curve steering wheel position and speed (from not ready for operation. approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)). lighting) on vehicles with Bi-Xenon If the cornering light swivelling device fails, headlight system. The headlights shine at an angle of up the relevant dipped beam is switched off. to 15° to the right or left of the direction The corresponding front fog light is of travel. automatically switched on for reasons of Motorway lighting safety. At higher speeds and continuous Consult a workshop. We recommend your straight ahead travel, the dipped Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. beam automatically raises slightly, thereby increasing headlight range. If control indicator B flashes for approx. 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the headlights have been set to symmetrical dipped beam; see "Headlights when driving abroad" on page 140. 138 Lighting

Picture no: 17128t.tif Picture no: 17129t.tif Picture no: 17130t.tif Door-to-door lighting function Parking lights 3 Instrument illumination, The dipped beam and reversing lights The front parking light and tail light of one information display illumination come on for approx. 30 seconds after the side of the vehicle can be activated when Comes on when ignition is switched on. driver’s door is closed, serving as door-to- parking: Brightness can be adjusted when the door lighting after exiting from the vehicle. 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3. exterior lights are on: push to release To activate function: 2. Ignition off. knob k and then turn it clockwise or 1. Switch off ignition. anticlockwise and hold until the desired 3. Move turn signal stalk all the way up brightness is obtained. 2. Remove ignition key. (right parking light) or down (left parking Display mode 3 – see page 58. 3. Open driver’s door. light). 4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering An acoustic signal sounds and control wheel. indicator O illuminates briefly in the instrument panel to indicate activation. If the driver’s door is left open, the lights will go out after two minutes. To switch it off, switch on the ignition or move the turn signal stalk in the opposite Door-to-door lighting can be deactivated direction. by inserting the key in the starter switch or by pulling the turn signal stalk toward the steering wheel again while the driver’s door is open. Lighting 139

Picture no: 17131t.tif Picture no: 17132t.tif Picture no: 17133t.tif Courtesy light Front reading lights 3 Courtesy lights and rear reading lights 3 Front courtesy light Left and right reading lights are Centre switch position: the rear courtesy Comes on automatically when the vehicle is individually operable. With ignition on: light comes on together with the front one unlocked with the remote control, when a On = Press button a when a door is open. door is opened or when the key is removed Off = Press button a again The rear reading lights on the left and right from the starter switch after the ignition is can be switched on separately. switched off. With ignition on: Goes off automatically after a delay when On = Switch position I the doors are closed or immediately when Off = Switch position0 the ignition is switched on or the doors are locked. To operate manually from inside when the doors are closed: On = Press button c Off = Press button c again 140 Lighting

Entry lighting 3 Battery discharge protection Do as follows to prevent glare: After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument To prevent the battery from becoming Vehicles with halogen headlight and switch lighting come on for a few discharged, the courtesy light, reading system or Xenon headlight system 3 seconds. lights, luggage compartment lighting and Have the headlights adjusted by a Door handle lighting 3 glove compartment lighting switch off workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall When the exterior lights are on, the interior automatically 10 minutes after the ignition Authorised Repairer. is switched off. front door handles are illuminated. Vehicles with Adaptive Forward Illuminated mirror in the sunvisors 3 Lighting 3 The lighting switches on when the cover is Light covers (AFL) opened. The inside of the light covers may mist up 1. Pull and hold stalk for main beam on briefly in poor, wet and cold weather steering wheel (headlight flash). Glove compartment lighting conditions, in heavy rain or after washing. on when lid is open. The mist disappears quickly by itself; to 2. Switch on ignition. Cigarette lighter and ashtray help, switch on the lights. 3. After approx. 3 seconds, an acoustic illumination 3 signal sounds and then AFL control Comes on when ignition is switched on. Headlights when driving abroad indicator B flashes approx. 4 seconds. Luggage compartment lighting The asymmetrical dipped beam increases After the switch, AFL control indicator B Comes on when the boot lid / tailgate is the field of vision on the passenger’s side of flashes for 4 seconds each time the ignition opened. the lane. is switched on. Automatically regulated centre console This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the To return to asymmetrical dipped beam, lighting 3 vehicle is driven in countries where traffic pull and hold the main beam stalk again, Spotlight in housing of interior mirror. drives on the opposite side of the road. switch on the ignition and wait for the Daylight-dependent, automatically acoustic signal. AFL control indicator B regulated centre console lighting with will then discontinue flashing. ignition switched on. Control indicator B – see page 42. Puddle light 3 After unlocking the vehicle, the number plate lights come on for a few seconds. Windows, sunroof 141

Windows, sunroof 9 Warning

Take care when operating the electrically operated windows 3 and the sunroof 3. Risk of injury, particularly to children. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly. If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the electrically operated door windows. Keep a close watch on the windows and sunroof when closing them. Ensure that Electrically operated door windows 3 141 nothing becomes trapped in them as Picture no: 17134t.tif 3 Panoramic windscreen 3 ...... 144 they move. Operated via two or four switches in the driver’s door handle. The front switches are Sunroof 3 ...... 144 To prevent unauthorised operation, for the driver and front passenger’s doors. switch ignition off, remove ignition key 3 The rear switches 3 are for the rear doors. and open driver’s door. Additional switches are located in the front passenger’s door and rear doors 3. Electrically operated door windows 3 For incremental operation, briefly pull or press the switch. For automatic opening or The electrically operated door windows closing, pull or press the switch longer. Pull can be used or press the switch again to stop the z with ignition on, movement. z within 5 minutes of switching ignition off 3, z within 5 minutes of switching ignition key to position 1. Operational readiness ends when the driver’s door is opened. 142 Windows, sunroof

Picture no: 17135t.tif Picture no: 17136t.tif Picture no: 17976t.tif Safety function Child safety system for rear windows 3 Central switch for electrically operated If the window glass encounters resistance Switch z between the rear switches in the door windows, above the middle of the window during driver’s door handle Astra TwinTop automatic closing, it is immediately z forward (red field visible): rear door Button $ or " in the roof console. stopped and the window opened again. switches non-operational, Press button $: all windows are closed. In the event of difficulty due to frost or the z rearward (green field visible): rear door Press button $: all windows are opened. like, press the relevant window switch switches operational. several times until the window is closed. Windows, sunroof 143

Overload If the windows are repeatedly operated at short intervals, the power supply is briefly cut off. The system is protected by fuses in the fusebox – see page 261. Fault Automatic opening and closing of the windows is not possible. Activate window electronics as follows: 1. Close doors. 2. Switch on ignition. 3. Window completely open. Picture no: 17046t.tif Picture no: 17034t.tif Operating windows from outside 3 Open&Start system with electronic key 3 4. Close the window and hold the button The windows of vehicles with electrically Hold down button q of remote control to depressed at least 5 seconds. operated windows in all doors 3 can also open. To close, hold down button p or 5. Repeat for each window. be opened or closed from outside using the touch sensor in door handle for longer. The remote control. electronic key must be recognised within Radio frequency remote control with the external reception range. It is advisable mechanical key for the driver to keep the electronic key on Hold down button q or p of the remote his person. control until all the windows are open or fully closed. 144 Windows, sunroof

Picture no: 17140t.tif Picture no: 17141t.tif Picture no: 17138t.tif Panoramic windscreen 3 To close Sunroof 3 To open Move the roof lining forward to a suitable Operated via rocker switches in the roof Turn the handle to the right and move the position. When moved all the way forward, console when the ignition is switched on. the roof lining engages in position. roof lining rearward to a suitable position. For incremental operation, briefly press the Note button. For automatic opening or closing, Close the sunvisors before sliding the roof press the button longer. lining. Windows, sunroof 145

To raise Note When the roof is closed, press button ü. z If the top of the roof is wet, raise roof, The roof is tilted in the rear. allow water to run off and then open To open roof. Press button ü again from the tilted z When using a roof rack, check the position. The roof opens to its stop. clearance of the sunroof to avoid To close damage. Press button d. Overload For reasons of safety, the roof closes from If the system is overloaded, the power its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold supply is automatically cut off for a short button d depressed to close the roof time. completely. The system is protected by fuses in the Picture no: 17139t.tif fusebox – see page 261. Sunblind Fault Used to reduce sun penetration into the If the sunroof and sunblind do not operate interior when the sunroof is closed. properly, activate electronics as follows: The sunblind opens when the sunroof 1. Switch on ignition. opens. 2. Close the sunroof and hold button d To open depressed at least 10 seconds. Press button G. The sunblind opens to its 3. Close sunblind and hold button H stop. depressed at least 10 seconds. To close Press button H. For reasons of safety, the blind closes from its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold button d depressed to close completely. 146 TwinTop

With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra TwinTop unites the benefits of a coupe with those of a convertible. 9 Warning

Take care when operating the convertible hardtop. Risk of injury. Monitor the action zone above, to the side and to the rear of the vehicle during roof operation. Make sure that nothing could become pinched. Make sure no one is in the action zone of the roof or boot lid during roof operation. Picture no: 18024T.tif Risk of injury. TwinTop TwinTop...... 146 Check the amount height, length and Operating the convertible hardtop Wind deflector 3...... 149 width of available space before Operational when the key is in position 1 Rollover protection system ...... 151 operating the roof, e.g. in a garage, in the starter switch. Luggage compartment...... 152 parking garage or when a bicycle rack Requirements: is fitted. z Vehicle is stationary or driving no more Vehicle passengers must be informed than 20 mph (30 km/h). accordingly. z Luggage compartment blind is closed Before leaving the vehicle, remove and engaged – see above and the ignition key in order to prevent page 102. unauthorised operation of the windows z Boot lid is closed. and sunroof. If any of the requirements are not fulfilled, a warning buzzer sounds when the switch is actuated and the roof does not open or close. TwinTop 147

Picture no: 17962t.tif Picture no: 17970t.tif Picture no: 17963t.tif To open the roof The roof can also be opened with the To close the roof There must be no objects in front of the remote control when the vehicle is There must be no objects in the pivot area rear window or in the pivot area of the roof stationary. Unlock the vehicle. Press of the roof and boot lid. q and boot lid. button again and hold depressed until Hold button < in the roof console Hold button > in the roof console the roof is completely open and the boot lid depressed until the roof and boot lid are depressed until the roof is completely open is closed. completely closed. and the boot lid is closed. During operation with the remote control, An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the the door windows are opened completely. closing procedure. opening procedure. Open the door windows slightly before Open the door windows slightly before closing the roof. If button < is pressed opening the roof. If button > is pressed again after the acoustic signal sounds, the again after the acoustic signal sounds, the door windows will close. door windows will close. 6 148 TwinTop

Indicator and warning buzzers z Continuous warning buzzer during roof z Indicator buzzer upon completed operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have opening or closing of the convertible been triggered. hardtop. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising minute before the end of the 9-minute or lowering of the electric luggage standby time with the roof in an compartment loading aid. intermediate position. z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed z Continuous warning buzzer starting one during roof operation. minute before the end of the 9-minute z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully standby time with the loading aid in a opening during operation of the luggage raised position. compartment loading aid. Picture no: 17971t.tif z Gong tone during roof operation if The roof can also be closed with the remote vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph control when the vehicle is stationary. Lock (30 km/h). the vehicle. Press button p again and hold z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds depressed until the roof and boot lid are 20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully completely closed. open or closed. z Three gong tones during roof or loading aid operation if the luggage compartment blind is not attached. z Three gong tones during roof operation if outside temperature is below –20 °C, vehicle battery voltage is too low or the system is overloaded. TwinTop 149

Note Fault z Do not open the luggage compartment The automatic drive of the roof is only until the acoustic signal indicating the operational if the roof is in the proper open end of the roof opening or closing or closed position. procedure has sounded. Check if: z The luggage compartment blind must z the luggage compartment blind is always be closed during roof operation. engaged in the closed position, z There must be no one at the covers z the boot lid is completely closed, behind the rear head restraints. z outside temperature is above –20 °C, z There must be no objects in the pivot area or the roof or on the covers behind z there is sufficient battery voltage, the rear head restraints. z there is a system overload. z The roof can only be operated at If the automatic drive is not operational, Picture no: 17964t.tif temperatures above –20 °C. If the two persons are required to manually close Wind deflector 3 temperature is below this limit, a buzzer the roof. See the accompanying With the wind deflector installed will sound three times when roof instructions for Astra TwinTop. We turbulence, draughts and noise in the operation is requested. recommend that you seek professional passenger’s compartment are reduced z The roof can be held in an intermediate assistance. when the roof is open. position for 9 minutes to facilitate The rear seats cannot be occupied when cleaning of roof spaces. This is done by the wind deflector is in place. disengaging the actuation switch. One minute before the end of this period, a Do not place any objects on the wind continuous buzzer sounds as a warning deflector. that the hold period is almost over and The wind deflector is folded together in a the roof could start to move. stowage compartment 3 in the luggage z Operating the roof while travelling on compartment beneath the floor hatch. uneven roads could lead to malfunction If the vehicle is fitted with a spare wheel 3, and damage. the wind deflector is in the luggage compartment. 150 TwinTop

Picture no: 17965t.tif Picture no: 17966t.tif Picture no: 17967t.tif Fitting Join together the unfolded ends of the wind Insert the guide clips of the wind deflector Take the wind deflector from the luggage deflector: press in the pin at the slider, in the seat belt recesses between the rear compartment. guide the hinge over the pin and release head restraints. Expand the collapsed wind deflector as the slider so that the pin engages in the illustrated. hinge. TwinTop 151

Rollover protection system To optimise safety in the event of a rollover, the Astra TwinTop is equipped with reinforced windscreen frame and anti-roll bars behind the rear seat head restraints. The anti-roll bars are fixed or deployable depending on model variant.

6

Picture no: 17968t.tif Picture no: 17969t.tif Pull the toggle of the right and left locking The wind deflector can be folded back pin and turn to lock. Straighten out the when not in use. wind deflector, turn the toggle back and If the wind deflector is folded and the rear engage the locking pin in the recess in the seats are unoccupied, the wind deflector side trim. can remain mounted in the vehicle when the roof is closed. Removing Reverse the procedure to remove. Stow the wind deflector in the luggage compartment. 152 TwinTop

Picture no: 17975t.tif Picture no: 17974t.tif Picture no: 17973t.tif Fixed anti-roll bars Deployable anti-roll bars 3 Luggage compartment are secured to the vehicle bodywork. are located between the rear head The roof can only be opened if the load in restraints and the boot lid in such a way the luggage compartment does not that they are out of sight. In the event of a exceed the height of the luggage rollover, head-on collision or side-impact, compartment blind. The marked load the anti-roll bars deploy upwards within height (see illustration above) must not be milliseconds. The convertible roof must not exceeded and it must be possible for the be operated if the anti-roll bars have been blind to close flat. Otherwise, the roof or deployed. A continuous warning will sound load could be damaged when the roof is if the switch is actuated. The airbag control opened. indicator v illuminates if the anti-roll bars have been deployed. Electrically operated loading aid for the luggage compartment – see page 103. Manual retraction of the anti-roll bars – see page 130. Luggage compartment blind – see page 102. Further information – see page 131. Climate control 153 Climate control

Air vents ...... 155 Cooled glove compartment 3 ...... 155 Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors 3 ...... 156 Heated front seats 3...... 156 Heating and ventilation system ...... 157 Air conditioning system 3...... 160 Automatic air conditioning system 3 162 Picture no: 17930t.tif Picture no: 17142t.tif Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 .... 167 Heating and ventilation system, The buttons for cooling n and air Air intake ...... 173 air conditioning system 3 recirculation 4 are only found on model 3 Pollen filter ...... 173 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are variants with an air conditioning system . Note ...... 173 combined into one unit that is designed to Air conditioning system 3 – Maintenance ...... 173 provide comfort regardless of the season, see pages 160, 162. weather or outside temperature. When cooling 3 is activated, the air is cooled and dried. The heating unit heats the air as required in all operating modes depending on the position of the temperature switch. The air supply can be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan. 154 Climate control

The set values appear on the information display. Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 – see page 167.

Picture no: 17931t.tif Picture no: 17143t.tif Automatic air conditioning Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 system 3 Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle Provides a comfortable interior regardless interior regardless of the conditions of the weather, outside temperature or outside. season. To ensure a uniform and comfortable When an interior temperature is set with climate in the vehicle, the temperature the temperature control, the temperature of inflowing air, airflow rate and air and amount of inflowing air are distribution are automatically adapted automatically regulated. A uniform, based on the climate conditions outside comfortable climate in the vehicle is the vehicle and the current temperature thereby automatically obtained based on of the vehicle interior. outside climate conditions. Automatic air conditioning system – see page 162. Climate control 155

Picture no: 17151t.tif Picture no: 17152t.tif Picture no: 17171t.tif Air vents To close the vent, turn the vertical adjuster Cooled glove compartment 3 Pleasant ventilation to the head area wheel fully up. The symbol 0 appears. The Cooled air is fed into the glove controlled by the position of the slats of the vent remain open although the compartment through a nozzle. air supply is closed. temperature switch. If glove compartment cooling is not Centre and side air vents (1) Windscreen defroster nozzles (2) required, slide the slider forward. Vents open: vertical knurled wheel down. Air distribution switch to l or J: Adjust the flow of air by turning the air flows onto windscreen and side horizontal knurled wheel. windows. Additional vents below the windscreen and door windows and in the front footwell. 156 Climate control

General information, as well as information on air intake, air outlet, pollen filter and maintenance, see page 173

Picture no: 17147t.tif Picture no: 17148t.tif Heated rear window, Heated front seats 3 heated exterior mirrors 3 Operation with ignition switched on: Operation with ignition switched on: Press switch ß one or more times to set the On = Press Ü desired heat output. The control indicator Off = Press Ü again in the switch indicates which of the three heating levels is active. Control indicator in pushbutton. We do not recommend prolonged use of Heating works with the engine running and the highest level for people with sensitive is switched off automatically after around skin. 15 minutes. Deactivation: press switch ß repeatedly Astra TwinTop: The headed rear window until the control indicator goes out. and heated exterior mirrors 3 are deactivated when the roof is open. Front seat heating is operational when the engine is running. Vehicles with diesel particle filter 3: the heated rear window is automatically switched on during particle filter cleaning. Climate control 157

Picture no: 17144t.tif Picture no: 17145t.tif Picture no: 17146t.tif Heating and ventilation system Centre rotary knob: Temperature Right-hand rotary knob: Airflow Left-hand rotary knob: Air distribution Turn right = warm Four fan speeds: L to head area via adjustable Turn left = cold x = off air vents and to footwell 4 = maximum airflow M to head area via adjustable The rate of airflow is determined by the air vents fan. The fan should therefore also be switched on during a journey. l To the windscreen and front door windows J to the windscreen, front door windows, to footwell K to footwell Open the air vents when the switch is set to L or M. 158 Climate control

Heating The comfort and general well-being of the The amount of heat is dependent on the vehicle occupants are to a large extent coolant temperature and is thus not fully dependent on a suitable ventilation and attained until the engine is warm. heating setting. For rapid warming of the passenger’s To obtain a temperature distribution for a compartment: "cool head and warm feet", set the rotary z Open air vents. knob for air distribution to K or J and set z Set the air distribution switch to the the temperature switch in the middle. desired position – see page 157. z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as far as it will go. z Activate fan speed three. Picture no: 17153t.tif For vehicles with Quickheat 3, electrical Ventilation auxiliary heating warms up the z For maximum ventilation to the head passenger’s compartment more quickly. area: set air distribution switch to M, open all air vents, open slats of upper and centre air vents all the way - seepage155. z For ventilation to footwell: set air distribution switch to K. z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area and the footwell: set air distribution switch to L. z Set the temperature to the desired setting. z Set the fan to the desired setting. Climate control 159

z Set fan to 3 or 4. z Open side air vents as required and direct them towards door windows. z Switch on heated rear window Ü. For simultaneous warming of the footwell, set air distribution switch to J.

Picture no: 17154t.tif Picture no: 17155t.tif Heating the footwell Demisting and defrosting windows z Set air distribution switch to K. z Set the temperature switch in the 9 Warning right-hand zone. Failure to follow the instructions could z Switch on fan. lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impaired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp weather, damp clothing or low outside temperatures: z Move air distribution switch to l. z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as far as it will go (warm). 160 Climate control

Air conditioning system 3 As a supplement to the heating and ventilation system, the air conditioning system cools and dehumidifies (dries) inflowing air. If cooling or dehumidification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. Cooling switches off automatically at low outside temperatures.

Picture no: 17149t.tif Picture no: 17150t.tif Cooling n Air recirculation system 4 Operate only with the engine on and the The recirculation switch 4 is used to set fan running: the ventilation system in recirculation On = Press n mode (control indicator). n Off = Press again If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate Control indicator in pushbutton. from outside: temporarily switch on air recirculation system 4. Climate control 161

The air recirculation system minimises the entry of outside air. The humidity increases, and the windows can mist up. The quality of the passenger’s compartment air deteriorates which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy. Air distribution to l: the air recirculation system is automatically switched off to speed up window demisting and prevent fogging.

Picture no: 17156t.tif Picture no: 17157t.tif Comfort setting Maximum cooling 3 z Set cooling n as desired. Open windows and sunroof briefly so that warm air can escape rapidly. z Air recirculation system 4 off. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution switch to M or L. z Activate recirculation system 4. z Set temperature switch as desired. z Set air distribution switch to M. z Switch on fan at desired speed. z Turn the temperature switch z Open vents as required. anticlockwise as far as it will go (cold). Temperature switch in centre of z Set fan to 4. adjustment range: warmer air will flow into z the footwell and cooler air into the upper Open all vents. zone, with warmer air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre vents. 162 Climate control

z Cooling n on. Automatic air conditioning z Move air distribution switch to l. system 3 z Turn the temperature switch clockwise. Provides a uniformly comfortable interior regardless of the weather, outside z Set fan to 4. temperature or season. z Open side air vents as required and To ensure a constant and comfortable direct them towards door windows. climate in the vehicle, the temperature of z Switch on heated rear window Ü. the inflowing air and the airflow rate are changed automatically based on climate conditions outside the vehicle. Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are Picture no: 17158t.tif automatically compensated. Window demisting and de-icing 9 Warning

Failure to follow the instructions could lead to misted or icy windows and accidents stemming from impaired visibility.

Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp weather, damp clothing or low outside temperatures: Climate control 163

Picture no: 17932t.tif Picture no: 17933t.tif Picture no: 17934t.tif Automatic mode Air distribution setting Temperature preset Basic setting for maximum comfort: L to head area via adjustable Set the rotary knob to a value between z Set fan switch to A. air vents and to footwell 17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate settings M are possible. z Set air distribution switch to desired to head area via adjustable position - see next column. air vents The selected temperature is maintained. z Use rotary knob to set temperature l to the windscreen and For reasons of comfort, temperature can to 22 °C (a higher or lower temperature front door windows only be changed in small increments. can be set as desired). J to the windscreen, There is no temperature control for z Air conditioning compressor activation – front door windows, settings below 17 °C (all the way left) or see page 164. to footwell above 27 °C (all the way right). The air K to footwell conditioning system works at maximum z All front air vents open. If desired, the cooling or heating. rear vents also 3. Intermediate settings are possible. Deactivation of the air conditioning Open the air vents when the switch is compressor can reduce the level of comfort set to L or M. and safety – see page 164. 164 Climate control

Picture no: 17935t.tif Picture no: 17936t.tif Picture no: 17937t.tif Airflow setting To activate / deactivate air conditioning Manual air recirculation mode 1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting. compressor (cooling) n The air recirculation system prevents the Intermediate settings are possible. Operate only with the engine on and the entry of outside air and the air in the A Automatic control of fan speed. fan running: passenger’s compartment is circulated. n On = Press Press button 4, the control indicator in x Fan off. n Off = Press again the button will illuminate. Fan speed is regulated to provide the rate Control indicator in the switch illuminates. of airflow necessary to maintain the pre- The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air selected temperature. When cooling (AC compressor) is active, air recirculation mode. The quality of the is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or passenger’s compartment air deteriorates Select automatic mode for the highest level dehumidification is not desired, switch off which may cause the vehicle occupants to of comfort. cooling in order to save fuel. feel drowsy. In operation without cooling When the fan is off, the air conditioning Cooling switches off automatically at low the air humidity increases, so the windows compressor is also off. outside temperatures. may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button will go out. Climate control 165

Heating For vehicles with Quickheat 3, electrical The amount of heat is dependent on the auxiliary heating warms up the coolant temperature and is thus not fully passenger’s compartment more quickly. attained until the engine is warm. The comfort and general well-being of the For rapid warming of the passenger’s vehicle occupants are to a large extent compartment: dependent on a suitable ventilation and z Set the air distribution switch to the heating setting. desired position – see page 157. To obtain a stratification of temperature z Set the centre rotary knob to the desired in the vehicle with the pleasant effect temperature. We recommend a value of "cool head and warm feet", set the air about 22 °C. distribution switch to K or J, set the temperature switch to about 22 °C and z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be open the centre air vents. Picture no: 17938t.tif manually set: set the rotary knob to Ventilation position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are z For maximum ventilation in head area: also possible. set air distribution switch to M and open all vents. z For ventilation to footwell: set air distribution switch to K. z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area and the footwell: set air distribution switch to L. z Set desired temperature. z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be manually set: set the rotary knob to position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are also possible. 166 Climate control

z Set temperature to maximum heating, i.e. turn the centre rotary knob all the way to the right (28 °C). z Switch on heated rear window Ü. Operation with cooling (air conditioning compressor) is not possible when outside temperatures are low. To switch off, press button V again; the automatic air conditioning system will operate at the settings selected previously.

Picture no: 17939t.tif Picture no: 17940t.tif Maximum cooling for very hot interior Window demisting and de-icing Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so that warm air can escape rapidly. 9 Warning z Cooling n on. Failure to follow the instructions could z Set air distribution switch to M. lead to misted or icy windows and z Set the temperature switch to the desired accidents stemming from impaired temperature. visibility. z Set fan switch to A. Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp z Open all vents. weather, damp clothing or low outside temperatures: Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 provides maximum cooling down to the set value. z Cooling n on. At settings below 17 °C (rotary knob all the z Press button V: in switch position A, the way to the left), the system continually runs fan automatically switches to the highest with maximum cooling. When the air speed and air is directed to the conditioning compressor is running, the windscreen. system is automatically set to air recirculation. Climate control 167

Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 Provides the greatest amount of comfort in the interior regardless of the weather, outside temperature or season. To ensure a constant and comfortable climate in the vehicle, the temperature of the inflowing air, the airflow rate and the air distribution are changed automatically according to climatic conditions outside the vehicle. Temperature changes due to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are automatically compensated. Picture no: 17143t.tif Picture no: 17160t.tif Data is shown on the information display. Manual settings e.g. operating without The automatic air recirculation system 3 Setting modifications are briefly shown in cooling and air distribution can be selected has an air quality sensor 3 to detect the information display, superimposing using the menu – see page 169. harmful ambient gases, in which case it will over the currently displayed menu. When cooling (air conditioning switch automatically to recirculation. The display can vary according to the type compressor) is active, air is cooled and When set to automatic mode, the system of presentation – see page 46. dehumidified. provides the optimal settings for almost all The settings of the system are The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen conditions. If necessary, system settings automatically stored specifically for the and spores from the inflowing outside air. can be modified manually. vehicle key used - see page 68. The system is only operational when the Different settings are stored for each engine is running. remote control. Use of a remote control will Cooling (air conditioning compressor) activate the settings associated with it. switches off automatically at low outside temperatures. 168 Climate control

Switching off the AC compressor (Eco Automatic air recirculation mode 3 appears in display) can reduce comfort The ventilation system is set to recirculation and affect safety – see page 170. mode and interior air is recirculated. All air vents are actuated automatically The automatic air recirculation system has in automatic mode. The air vents should an air quality sensor to detect harmful therefore always be open – see page 155. gases in the outside air, in which case it will switch automatically to recirculation. If outside temperatures are low and cooling (air conditioning compressor) is switched off, automatic air recirculation is only available in a limited capacity so as to prevent the windows from misting. Activate recirculation manually if so desired. Picture no: 17000t.tif Automatic mode Switching automatic recirculation on or Basic setting for maximum comfort: off – see page 172. z Press AUTO button. Manual recirculation mode – see page 172. z Open all air vents. z Air conditioning compressor activation – see page 170. z Set pre-selected temperature to 22 °C using left rotary knob. The temperature can be set higher or lower as desired. Climate control 169

Temperature preset Climate Air distribut. The left rotary knob can be used to set Air distribut. temperatures between 16 °C and 28 °C. AC For reasons of comfort, temperature can Autom. blower only be changed in small increments. Auto. recirc For vehicles with Quickheat 3, electrical heating warms up the passenger’s compartment more quickly. If a temperature below 16 °C is set, Lo appears in the display: the system runs constantly at maximum cooling power. The temperature is not regulated. If a temperature above 28 °C is set, Picture no: 17161t.tif Picture no: 17162t.tif Hi appears in the display: the system runs Manual settings Individual menu items are marked by constantly at maximum heating power. Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or turning the centre knob and selected by The temperature is not regulated. misted windows), the functions of the pressing it. Selecting certain menus by system can be modified manually. pressing the knob will open a submenu 3. Temperature settings are stored when the ignition is switched off. System settings can be changed via the To exit a menu, turn the centre knob left or centre knob, the buttons and the menus right to Return or Main and select. depicted on the display. Manual settings are stored when the Press the centre knob to call up the menu. ignition is switched off. The menu for manual system settings appears in the display. 170 Climate control

The airflow can be increased or decreased Climate by turning the right knob. Air distribut. To return to automatic mode: press AC Air conditioning V button or AUTO. Autom. blower on / off Heated rear window – see page 156. Auto. recirc

Picture no: 17163t.tif Picture no: 17164t.tif Window demisting and de-icing Activating and deactivating air conditioning compressor 9 Warning If no cooling or dehumidification is required, switch the air conditioning Failure to follow the instructions could compressor off (maximum energy savings): lead to misted or icy windows and mark menu item AC from the manual accidents stemming from impaired settings menu and select by pressing. visibility. Eco appears on the display. Inflowing air is neither cooled nor Misted or icy windows, e.g. due to damp dehumidified. This restricts the level of weather, damp clothing or low outside comfort provided by the Electronic Climate temperatures: Control (ECC) 3. This may cause the Press V button. V appears in display: windows to mist up, for example. control indicator in button illuminates. To activate cooling: select menu item AC The temperature and the air distribution from the manual settings menu and press are adjusted automatically, the fan runs at to activate cooling. a faster speed and the windows are rapidly cleared of ice and moisture. Climate control 171

Air distribut. Automatic blower

Strong Normal Weak

Picture no: 17165t.tif Picture no: 17166t.tif Picture no: 17167t.tif Air distribution Airflow Fan control in automatic mode 3 Press the centre knob. The possible air Turn right-hand knob right or left. The Fan regulation in automatic mode can distribution settings appear one after selected fan speed in indicated with x and be modified. another in the display. the number in the display. Select menu item Automatic blower from Air distribution can also be set in the Air At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air the manual settings menu and select the distribut. menu: conditioning compressor) are switched off. desired fan control. Up Air distribution to windscreen To return to automatic mode: press AUTO Depending on the setting, the maximum and front door windows button. airflow, and thereby the noise level, will Centre Air to vehicle occupants increase. via front adjustable air vents Down Air distribution to footwell Return to automatic air distribution: deactivate corresponding setting or press AUTO button. 172 Climate control

Climate Air distribut. AC Automatic recirculation Autom. blower Residual air conditioning on Auto. recirc air control at bad outside air

Picture no: 17168t.tif Picture no: 17169t.tif Picture no: 17170t.tif Switching automatic recirculation 3 Manual air recirculation mode Air conditioning with the engine not on or off The air recirculation system prevents the running The automatic air recirculation system has entry of outside air and the air in the When the vehicle is stopped and the an air quality sensor to detect harmful passenger’s compartment is circulated. ignition off, the heat or cooling power still gases in the outside air, in which case it will Press button 4, the control indicator in in the system can be used to condition the switch automatically to recirculation. the button will illuminate. passenger’s compartment, for example when stopped at a level crossing. Select menu item Auto. recirc from the The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air manual settings menu and switch it on or recirculation mode. The quality of the Press AUTO button with the ignition off. off by pressing. passenger’s compartment air deteriorates Residual air conditioning on will appear Switch to manual air recirculation as which may cause the vehicle occupants to briefly in the display. necessary. feel drowsy. In operation without cooling The air conditioning will operate for a the air humidity increases, so the windows limited period of time. may mist up. Consequently, manual air To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO recirculation should only be run for short button. periods of time. To deactivate manual air recirculation: press button 4 again. The control indicator in the button will go out. Climate control 173

Note Maintenance If the windscreen mists up in damp In order to ensure continuously efficient weather, temporarily set the system as performance, the air conditioning described under "Window demisting" – compressor 3 must be operated for a see page 159, 162 or 170. few minutes once a month, irrespective Cooling 3 is most efficient when the of the weather and time of year. The 3 windows are closed. If the interior is Electronic Climate Control (ECC) , if extremely hot due to a long period in present, handles this automatically while strong sunlight, briefly open the windows driving. Air conditioning compressor and sunroof 3 to allow the hot air to operation is not possible when outside escape quickly. temperatures are low. When cooling 3 (air conditioning If a fault occurs, consult a workshop. compressor) is switched on condensation We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Picture no: 17438t.tif forms, which is expelled from the underside Repairer. Air intake of the vehicle. The air intakes in front of the windscreen in the engine compartment must be kept At least one air vent must be open while clear to allow air intake. Remove any cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is leaves, dirt or snow. on in order to prevent the evaporator from icing up due to lack of air movement. Pollen filter Cooling switches off automatically at low The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen outside temperatures. and spores from the air entering from outside. The active carbon layer 3 Do not cover the sensor on the instrument eliminates most odours and harmful panel as this could cause the Electronic ambient gases from the air. Climate Control (ECC) 3 to malfunction. Replace the pollen filter at the intervals given in the Service Booklet. 174 Easytronic

The semi-automatic Easytronic Easytronic transmission 3 permits manual (manual mode) or automatic gearshifting (automatic mode), both with automatic clutch control. 9 Warning

Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Transmission display ...... 174 Starting the engine...... 174 Easytronic operation via the selector lever ...... 175 Picture no: 17173t.tif Move selector lever toward N...... 175 Transmission display Starting-off...... 175 Shows the mode and current gear. Electronically controlled driving programmes...... 176 Starting the engine Winter programme T ...... 177 The engine can only be started when the Kickdown...... 178 foot brake is depressed. "N" is shown in the Braking assistance from engine ...... 178 transmission display and flashes if the foot Stopping the vehicle...... 178 brake is not depressed. Vehicle storage ...... 179 It is not necessary to select the neutral "Rocking the car"...... 179 position before starting. If no gear is Manoeuvring the vehicle...... 179 engaged, the transmission automatically Fault...... 180 shifts into neutral position (N) before starting the engine. This can lead to a Interruption of power supply ...... 180 slight delay when starting. Easytronic 175

It is also possible to start off without depressing the foot brake if the accelerator pedal is operated directly after movement of the selector lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the foot brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged and "A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display resumes showing "N". Start off by repeating the previously described procedure. In Automatic mode, selection of other gears is automatic irrespective of driving conditions. Picture no: 17002t.tif Picture no: 17174t.tif Move selector lever toward A Starting-off Easytronic operation via Switch between Automatic and Manual Depress the foot brake, release the mode. the selector lever handbrake and move the selector lever Always move the selector lever in the to A, + or -. Easytronic is in automatic Manual gearshifting is possible in manual appropriate direction as far as it will go. mode and first gear is engaged (second mode. "M" and the currently engaged gear Upon release, it automatically returns to gear if the Winter programme is active). appear in the transmission display. the centre position. Pay heed to the gear / "A1" appears in the transmission display If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic mode indicator in the transmission display. ("A2" if the Winter programme is active). will automatically shift to a lower gear even Move selector lever toward N The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot in Manual mode. This prevents the engine Neutral. brake is released. from stalling. 176 Easytronic

If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on Electronically controlled driving movement of the selector lever to + or - programmes Easytronic shifts to manual mode and z By means of delayed gear changing changes up or down. "M" and the currently (higher engine speeds) following a engaged gear appear in the transmission cold start, the operating temperature display. programme in automatic mode quickly Move selector lever toward R and automatically brings the catalytic Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is converter to the temperature required stationary. for optimum pollutant reduction. Depress the foot brake, release the z Adaptive programmes automatically handbrake and move the selector lever to adapt gearshifting in automatic mode to R. Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in suit the driving conditions, such as if the the transmission display. vehicle is towing a caravan / trailer, has Picture no: 17002t.tif The vehicle begins to "creep" when the foot a high payload, or is being driven Move selector lever toward + or - on inclines. + Shift to a higher gear. brake is released. - Shift to a lower gear. It is also possible to start off in reverse without depressing the foot brake if the If a higher gear is selected when the accelerator pedal is operated directly after running speed is too low, or a lower gear movement of the selector lever. If there is when the speed is too high, no shift is no immediate acceleration or the foot effected. This prevents the engine from brake is not depressed, no gear is engaged running at too low or too high revs. and "R" flashes. After a few seconds, the Gears can be skipped by moving the display resumes showing "N". Start off by selector lever repeatedly at short intervals. repeating the previously described procedure. Easytronic 177

If the Winter programme is activated, SPORT mode is deactivated. If the vehicle is switched to manual mode while the winter programme is active, the winter programme is interrupted. The winter programme resumes upon return to automatic mode.

Picture no: 17961t.tif Picture no: 17175t.tif z When SPORT mode is engaged, shift Winter programme T times are reduced and the transmission In the event of difficulties starting-off on shifts at higher engine speeds (unless slippery roads, press button T ("A", cruise control is on). SPORT mode – currently engaged gear and T appear in see page 210. the transmission display). Easytronic z Winter programme: press button T – switches to automatic mode and the see next column. vehicle sets off in second gear. The winter programme is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z turning off the ignition. In order to protect the Easytronic the winter programme automatically switches itself off at extremely high clutch temperatures. 178 Easytronic

When the engine speed approaches its Stopping the vehicle upper limit, the transmission shifts to a In Automatic or Manual mode, when the higher gear during kickdown even in vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter Manual mode. mode engaged, second gear) is engaged Without kickdown this automatic shift is automatically and the clutch released. not effected in Manual mode. In R reverse remains engaged. If SPORT mode is engaged, the drive A warning buzzer sounds when the driver’s wheels may spin slightly when starting-off door is opened if the engine is running, a with kickdown. This allows for maximum gear is engaged and the foot brake is not acceleration of the vehicle. depressed. The vehicle creeps if the handbrake is not engaged. Move the Braking assistance from engine selector lever to N and apply the Automatic mode handbrake. Picture no: 17176t.tif When driving downhill, Easytronic does not Kickdown shift into higher gears until a fairly high When stopping on gradients, engage the engine speed has been reached. When handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To Accelerator pedal pressed past the prevent overheating of the clutch, do not pressure point: below certain speeds, the braking, Easytronic shifts down in good time. increase engine speed to ensure smooth transmission shifts down into a lower gear. idling when in gear. Full engine power is available for Manual mode acceleration. To utilise the engine braking effect, select The clutch is automatically closed in the event of overheating. During kickdown no manual gearshifting is a lower gear in good time when driving possible. downhill. Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. Easytronic 179

Vehicle storage "Rocking the car" Before leaving the vehicle: If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle z engage handbrake, to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, z remove the ignition key or, with the move the selector lever between R and A Open&Start system 3, remove the (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while electronic key from the vehicle. applying light pressure to the accelerator The most recently engaged gear (indicator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid in transmission display) remains engaged. sudden acceleration. With N, no gear is engaged. This applies only to the exceptional When the ignition is switched off the circumstances mentioned above. Easytronic no longer responds to movement of the selector lever. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery Picture no: 17177t.tif may become discharged if the vehicle Manoeuvring the vehicle is parked for long periods. To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth If the handbrake has not been applied, during attempts to park or in garage the control indicator R flashes for a few entrances the creeping movement can seconds after the ignition is switched off. be utilised by releasing the foot brake. With the engine off and the handbrake not Never actuate accelerator and brake applied, when the driver’s door is opened a pedals simultaneously. warning buzzer sounds and the control To prevent damage, Easytronic indicator R flashes; switch on ignition, disengages the "creep" function when engage gear, switch off ignition and apply the temperature of the automatic clutch handbrake. is high. 180 Easytronic

If F appears in the transmission display, continued driving is not possible. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied.

Picture no: 17028t.tif Picture no: 17178t.tif Fault Interruption of power supply Control indicator A illuminates in the The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In battery is discharged and a gear has been the event of serious faults, F also appears selected. The vehicle cannot move. in the transmission display. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using It is possible to continue driving if only jump leads – see page 244. control indicator A illuminates. Manual mode can then no longer be selected. Easytronic 181

If the interruption of power supply was not 3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see 6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be caused by a discharged battery, consult illustration) so that no dirt can get into in full contact with the housing. a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall the opening when the cap is removed. Towing the vehicle and starting the engine Authorised Repairer. If the vehicle must be 4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by is not permitted when the clutch has been moved out of the flow of traffic, disengage lifting upwards – see illustration. released in this way, although the vehicle the clutch on vehicles with 5-speed can be moved a short distance. Easytronic. Disengaging the clutch is not 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using possible on vehicles with 6-speed a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3 – Consult a workshop immediately. Easytronic 3. The vehicle must be moved. see page 251) until clear resistance can We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Raise the vehicle by the front axle when be felt. The clutch has now been Repairer. towing. disengaged. To disengage the clutch Do not turn beyond the resistance, (only on vehicles with 5-speed Easytronic): since this can damage the Easytronic. 1. Apply handbrake and switch off ignition. 2. Open bonnet. 182 Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission 3 makes Automatic automatic gearchanges possible transmission (automatic mode). The engine can only be started when the gear selector is in position P or N. When starting in position N, depress the foot brake or apply the handbrake. After starting the engine, depress the brake before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been selected and the brake is released, the vehicle will "creep". Never operate the accelerator and the brake pedal simultaneously. The selected gear is Picture no: 17022t.tif displayed in the transmission display. Transmission display Selector lever settings P, R, N and D 9 Warning Display of mode or selected gear in left (automatic mode)...... 183 position of transmission display. The gear that has been selected by the transmission Gears 3, 2, 1 ...... 183 Disregard of these instructions may lead appears in the right position of the Electronically controlled driving to injuries or endanger life. programmes...... 184 transmission display. Winter programme T ...... 185 P Park position. Selecting D puts the transmission in Kickdown...... 185 automatic mode. R Reverse gear. Engine braking...... 185 "Rocking the car"...... 185 Only select 3, 2 or 1 to prevent automatic N Neutral. upshifting or as an aid in engine braking. Manoeuvring the vehicle...... 186 D Automatic mode. Stopping the vehicle...... 186 3, 2, 1 Selected gear 3. Fault...... 186 Interruption of power supply ...... 187 Automatic transmission 183

The selector lever can only be moved from Gears 3, 2, 1 P when the ignition is switched on and the 3, 2, 1 Transmission does not shift foot brake depressed (selector lever lock). above the selected gear. To engage P or R, push button on selector lever. Press button on selector lever to engage 3 or 1. The engine can only be started with lever in position P or N. When position N is selected, The current gear is displayed in the press foot brake or engage handbrake transmission display. before starting. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure.

Picture no: 17189t.tif Selector lever settings P, R, N and D (automatic mode) P Park position. Front wheels locked. Only engage when the vehicle is stationary and the handbrake is applied. "P" on the transmission display. R Reverse gear. Only engage when the vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on the transmission display. N Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the transmission display. D Drive position for normal driving in 1st gear to highest gear. "D" and the current gear appear in the transmission display. 184 Automatic transmission

z Automatic neutral shift function z By means of delayed gear changing automatically sets the transmission to N (higher engine speeds) following a cold to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at start, the operating temperature traffic lights. programme quickly and automatically The automatic neutral is activated when: brings the catalytic converter to the temperature required for optimum – the selector lever is in automatic pollutant reduction. mode 3, z The adaptive programme automatically – the selector lever is in position 3, 2 tailors gearshifting to the driving or 1, conditions, e.g. greater load or – the foot brake is depressed, gradients. – the vehicle is stationary, Picture no: 17961t.tif – the accelerator pedal is not Electronically controlled driving actuated, programmes – the transmission fluid temperature z When SPORT mode is engaged, the is greater than 0 °C. transmission shifts at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). As soon as the brake is released and the Control indicator 1 illuminates in the accelerator pedal is depressed, the transmission display. SPORT mode – vehicle starts off in the usual manner. see page 210. z Winter programme: press button T – see next page. Automatic transmission 185

Engine braking In order to utilise the engine braking effect when driving downhill, select drive range 3, 2 or, if necessary, 1 in good time. The braking action is most effective in drive range 1. If drive range 1 is selected at too high a speed, the transmission remains in second gear until the shift point for first gear is reached, e.g. as a result of deceleration. "Rocking the car" If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle Picture no: 17190t.tif Picture no: 17176t.tif to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, Winter programme T Kickdown move the selector lever from D to R in a Press button T if you are having problems Depressing the accelerator pedal past the repeat pattern while simultaneously starting-off on a slippery road surface. pressure point: depending on the engine applying light pressure to the accelerator To activate speed the transmission shifts to a lower pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid The winter programme can be activated gear. Full engine power is available for sudden acceleration. accelerating. in P, R, N, D and 3 (T illuminates in the This applies only to the exceptional transmission display). The vehicle starts off circumstances mentioned above. in 3rd gear. To deactivate The winter programme is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z shifting to 2 or 1 manually, z turning off the ignition. In order to prevent damage, the winter programme switches off automatically at high transmission oil temperatures. 186 Automatic transmission

Stopping the vehicle The selector lever can be left in the chosen gear with the engine running. When stopping on gradients engage handbrake or depress brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the transmission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while standing if a gear has been selected. Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. Picture no: 17177t.tif Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the Picture no: 17028t.tif Manoeuvring the vehicle handbrake. Then select P. Remove the Fault To manoeuvre the vehicle back and ignition key or, with Open&Start system, Control indicator A illuminates after the forth during attempts to park or in remove the electronic key 3 from the ignition is switched on. If it does not go out garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the after the start or illuminates while driving, movement can be utilised by releasing battery may become discharged if the there is a fault in the automatic the brake pedal. vehicle is parked up for long periods. transmission or engine electronics. Never actuate accelerator and brake The ignition key can only be removed when pedals simultaneously. the selector lever is in position P. With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes in the transmission display for 10 seconds when the ignition is switched off if P has not been engaged or the handbrake has not been applied. Automatic transmission 187

The transmission no longer shifts automatically. Vehicle can continue to be driven. Second gear is not available. Forward gears 1, 3 and 4 must be shifted manually using selector lever: 1 = 1st gear 2 =3rd gear 3, D =4th gear Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Picture no: 17191t.tif Picture no: 17192t.tif Interruption of power supply 3. Push the yellow catch forward with a If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector screwdriver and move the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P. lever out of P. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using 4. Mount selector lever trim on centre jump leads – see page 244. console and refit. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, Re-selecting P locks the selector lever release selector lever: again. Have cause of power supply interruption remedied. We recommend 1. Apply handbrake. that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised 2. Disengage selector lever trim rearward Repairer. from centre console and fold upwards. 188 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

This automatic transmission 3 allows Automatic both automatic gear changes (automatic 9 Warning mode) and manual gear changes (manual transmission with mode) 3. Disregard of these instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. ActiveSelect The engine can only be started when the selector lever is in position P or N. When Selecting D puts the transmission in starting in position N, depress the foot automatic mode. brake or apply the handbrake. After the engine has started, depress the brake If the selector lever is moved to the left from before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate the D position, manual mode is activated. whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been Gear changes can then be made manually selected and the brake is released, the by tipping the selector lever toward + or -. vehicle will "creep". Never operate the accelerator and the brake pedal simultaneously. The selected gear is displayed in the transmission display – see page 189. Transmission display ...... 189 Selector lever settings P, R, N and D (automatic mode)...... 189 ActiveSelect (manual mode) ...... 190 Electronically controlled driving programmes...... 191 Winter programme T ...... 192 Kickdown...... 192 Engine braking...... 193 "Rocking the car"...... 193 Manoeuvring the vehicle...... 193 Stopping the vehicle...... 194 Fault...... 194 Interruption of power supply ...... 195 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 189

The selector lever can only be moved out of position P or N with the ignition switched on and the foot brake applied (selector lever lock). In selector lever position N the selector lever lock is activated after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary.

Picture no: 17022t.tif Picture no: 17193t.tif Transmission display Selector lever settings P, R, N Display of mode or selected gear in left and D (automatic mode) position of transmission display. The gear P Park position. Front wheels locked. that has been selected by the transmission Only engage when the vehicle is appears in the right position of the stationary and the handbrake is transmission display. applied. "P" on the transmission P Park position. display. R Reverse gear. R Reverse gear. Only engage when the vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on N Neutral. the transmission display. D Automatic mode. N Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the M Manual mode with display of transmission display. selected gear. D Drive position for normal driving in 1st gear to highest gear. "D" and the current gear appear in the transmission display. 190 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

If the engine revs are too low the transmission automatically shifts to a lower gear, but not unless a certain speed has been reached. No automatic shifting to a higher gear takes place at high engine revs. For safety reasons, kickdown is also available in manual mode – see page 192. The selected gear is displayed in the transmission display – see page 189.

Picture no: 17194t.tif Picture no: 17195t.tif In position P or N, control indicator j ActiveSelect (manual mode) illuminates red in the selector lever Move selector lever out of position D and indicator strip if the selector lever is then forwards or backwards. blocked. + Shift to a higher gear To engage P or R, push button on selector lever. - Shift to a lower gear The engine can only be started with lever in If a higher gear is selected at a speed that position P or N. When position N is selected, is too slow or a lower gear is selected at a press foot brake or engage handbrake speed that is too high, the gear will not be before starting. changed. This prevents the revs from being too low or too high. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure. Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 191

z Automatic neutral shift function z The operating temperature programme automatically sets the transmission to N automatically brings the catalytic to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at converter to the temperature that is traffic lights. required for optimum emission reduction The automatic neutral is activated when: after a cold start by selecting an appropriate gear (increased engine – the selector lever is in automatic or revs). manual mode, z The adaptive programme automatically – the foot brake is depressed, tailors gearshifting to the driving – the vehicle is stationary, conditions, e.g. greater load or gradients. – the accelerator pedal is not actuated, Picture no: 17961t.tif – the transmission fluid temperature is Electronically controlled driving greater than 0 °C. programmes As soon as the brake is released and the z When SPORT mode is engaged, the accelerator pedal is depressed, the transmission shifts at higher engine vehicle starts off in the usual manner. speeds (unless cruise control is on). Control indicator 1 illuminates in the transmission display. SPORT mode – see page 210. z Winter programme: press button T – see next page. 192 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

To deactivate The winter programme is switched off by: z pressing button T again, z changing to manual mode, z turning off the ignition. In order to prevent damage, the winter programme switches off automatically at high transmission oil temperatures.

Picture no: 17196t.tif Picture no: 17176t.tif Winter programme T Kickdown Press button T if you are having problems Depressing the accelerator pedal past the starting-off on a slippery road surface. pressure point: depending on the engine To activate speed, the transmission shifts to a lower The winter programme can be activated in gear. Full engine power is available for automatic mode (T illuminates in accelerating. transmission display). The vehicle starts off For safety reasons, kickdown is available in in 4th gear. both automatic and manual mode. Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 193

Engine braking "Rocking the car" The automatic transmission automatically If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle selects the driving programmes with the to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, best possible braking effect. move the selector lever from D to R in a If necessary, lower gears can also be repeat pattern while simultaneously selected in manual mode to increase the applying light pressure to the accelerator braking effect. 1st gear has the greatest pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid braking effect. sudden acceleration. This applies only to the exceptional circumstances mentioned above.

Picture no: 17177t.tif Manoeuvring the vehicle To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping movement can be utilised by releasing the brake pedal. Never actuate accelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. 194 Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect

Stopping the vehicle The ignition key can only be removed when The selector lever can be left in the chosen the selector lever is in position P. gear with the engine running. If the selector lever is not in position P when When stopping on gradients engage the ignition is switched off, control handbrake or depress brake pedal. To indicator j and P flash in the selector lever prevent overheating of the transmission, indicator strip – see page 190, Fig. S 12103. do not increase engine revolutions to Move the selector lever to position P. ensure smooth idling while standing if a With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes gear has been selected. in the transmission display for 10 seconds Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy when the ignition is switched off if P has not period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level been engaged or the handbrake has not crossings. been applied. Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the Picture no: 17028t.tif handbrake. Then select P. Remove the Fault ignition key or, with Open&Start system, If there is a problem with the automatic remove the electronic key 3 from the transmission, control indicator A vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the illuminates. The transmission no longer battery may become discharged if the shifts automatically. The vehicle can vehicle is parked up for long periods. continue to be driven. Illumination of control indicator A may also indicate a problem with the engine electronics – see page 206. For diesel engines1) Z19DT and Z19DTH, illumination of control indicator A could also indicate that the diesel fuel filter must be drained of water – see page 294. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

1) Sales designation – see page 309. Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 195

2nd gear and the highest gear can be selected in manual mode. Depending on the nature of the problem, only the highest gear may be available. Only the highest gear is available in D in automatic mode.

Picture no: 17097t.tif Picture no: 17856t.tif Interruption of power supply 3. To open, push the yellow catch down If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector with a screwdriver and move the selector lever cannot be moved out of position P lever out of P or N. or N. 4. Refit the ashtray insert 3 or rubber If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using covering on the bottom of the stowage jump leads – see page 244. compartment 3 – see page 106. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, Re-selecting P or N locks the selector lever release selector lever: again. Have cause of power supply interruption remedied. We recommend 1. Apply handbrake. your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 2. Remove the ashtray insert 3 or the rubber covering on the bottom of the stowage compartment 3 – see page 106. 196 Driving hints Driving hints The first 600 miles (1000 km) Driving in mountainous terrain or Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do with a caravan / trailer not use full throttle. Never allow the engine The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its to labour at low revs. cooling power is therefore independent of Make good use of all gears. Depress the the engine speed. accelerator pedal a maximum of around Since a considerable amount of heat is three quarters of the available pedal travel generated at high engine speeds and less in all gears. at slower speeds, do not shift down when Do not drive faster than three quarters of climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping maximum speed. with the gradient in the higher gear. Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the Driving with a roof load first 125 miles (200 km). Do not exceed the permissible roof load – see pages 234, 318. For reasons of safety, Never coast with engine not distribute the load evenly and secure it running properly with retaining straps. Adjust the Many units will not function in this situation tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do (e.g. brake servo unit, Electro-Hydraulic not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Power-assisted Steering (EHPS)). Driving in Check and re-tighten the straps frequently. this manner is a danger to yourself and Observe country-specific regulations. Roof others. loads are not permitted on the Astra TwinTop. Brake servo unit When the engine is not running, the brake Switching off the engine servo unit is no longer effective once the When you switch off, fans in the engine brake pedal has been depressed once or compartment may continue running for a twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but time to cool the engine. significantly greater force is required for braking. If the engine temperature is very high, e.g. after driving in mountainous terrain: allow Electro-Hydraulic Power-assisted the engine to idle for approximately two minutes in order to prevent heat Steering (EHPS) accumulation. If the power-assisted steering fails when being towed with the engine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered, but considerably more force is required. Driving hints 197

Vehicles with turbocharged engine Engine speed Cooling fan After running at high engine speeds or high Drive in a low engine speed range for each The cooling fan is controlled via a engine loads, operate the engine briefly gear as much as possible. thermoswitch and therefore only runs if at a low load or run in neutral for approx. necessary. 30 seconds before switching off in order Warming up to protect the turbocharger. Vehicles with diesel particle filter 3: the After a cold start, the automatic cooling fan comes on automatically during transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in particle filter cleaning. Save energy – more miles automatic mode shifts into higher gears Please observe the running-in hints on the at higher rpm. This allows the catalytic Pedals previous page and the tips for saving converter to quickly reach the temperature energy on the following pages. Do not place any objects in the footwell required for optimum pollutant reduction. which could slip under the pedals and Good, technically correct and economical inhibit the pedal travel. driving ensures maximum durability and Correct gear selection performance for your vehicle. Engine in neutral and without revving in the To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and there must be no mats in the area of the Overrun driving at a speed too high for the selected pedals. The fuel supply is automatically shut off gear or transmission ratio increases wear during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is and fuel consumption. Battery care being driven down long gradients or when When driving slowly or when the vehicle is braking. To enable the overrun cut-off Change down stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic, stop- to take effect, do not accelerate during When decreasing speed, shift down into and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all overrun and, if in manual transmission the next lowest gear. Do not slip the unnecessary electrical loads where mode, do not declutch. To prevent clutch with a high-revving engine. This is possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated damage to the catalytic converter, overrun especially important when hill climbing. front seats). cut-off is temporarily deactivated when the Declutch when starting in order to relieve catalytic converter temperature is high. Clutch operation the strain on the starter and the battery. Vehicles with turbocharged engine Always depress the clutch pedal hard to Flow-generated noises may be audible if the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and the accelerator is released quickly on transmission damage. account of airflow in the turbocharger. When driving do not use the pedal as a footrest; this will cause substantial clutch wear. 198 Saving fuel, protecting the environment

Saving fuel, New painting techniques employ water as Warming up a solvent. z Full throttle and warming up at idle protecting the End-of-life vehicle recovery speed increase wear, fuel consumption, For detailed information on Vauxhall’s exhaust emission, the amount of environment on-going commitment to achieving an pollutant in the exhaust and the environmentally sustainable future, amount of noise. including; design for recycling, take back of z Drive off as soon as possible after End-of-Life Vehicle (ELVs) and the starting. recycling of ELVs, view www.vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details. Uniform speed z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel Energy and environment – consumption, the exhaust emissions, the conscious driving proportion of pollutant in the exhaust z High noise levels and exhaust emissions gas and the noise level. are often a result of driving without due z Do not accelerate and brake Trend-setting technology attention to saving energy and unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed, When developing and manufacturing your protecting the environment. watching the road. vehicle, Vauxhall used environment- z You should therefore drive with energy Avoid frequent starting-off and stopping friendly and in the main recyclable in mind – "more miles with less fuel". materials. The production methods used to e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance make your vehicle are likewise Reduce the noise level and exhaust traffic and in queues of traffic by means environmentally-compatible. emissions by adopting an environment- of clever planning. Select roads with conscious driving style. This is extremely good traffic flow. Recycling of production wastes keeps the worthwhile and improves the quality of circulation of material closed. Reduction of life. Idling energy and water requirements also helps z The engine also consumes fuel when to conserve natural resources. Fuel consumption depends to a great extent on your own personal driving idling. A highly advanced design means that your style. The following hints are intended to z If you have to wait for more than one vehicle can be easily disassembled at the help you consume fuel at a rate that is as minute, it is worthwhile switching off end of its working life, and the individual close as possible to the specified levels – the engine. Five minutes of idling materials separated for subsequent re-use. see page 313. corresponds to approximately 0.6 miles Materials such as asbestos and cadmium Check your vehicle’s fuel consumption (1 km) of driving. are not used. The refrigerant in the air every time you refuel. This facilitates conditioning system 3 is CFC-free. early detection of any irregularities causing increased fuel consumption. Saving fuel, protecting the environment 199

Overrun z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal Repair and maintenance z The fuel supply is automatically shut off results in distinct fuel savings with no z Improper repairs or adjustment and during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is major loss of speed. maintenance work can increase fuel being driven down long gradients or Drive at no more than around three consumption. Do not carry out work on when braking – see page 197. quarters of maximum speed and you will the engine yourself. z To enable the overrun cut-off to come use up to 50 % less fuel, without losing a You may out of ignorance infringe into action and save fuel, do not great deal of time. environmental laws by not disposing accelerate or declutch during overrun. of materials properly. Tyre pressure Appropriate parts might not be recycled. Correct gear selection z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to z High revs increase engine wear and fuel higher road resistance, costs money in Contact with some of the materials consumption. two ways: for more fuel and increased involved may pose a health hazard. tyre wear. z z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at We recommend that repair and high engine speeds. z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off. maintenance be entrusted to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Making use of the tachometer helps to Electrical loads save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed z The power consumption of electrical Extreme driving conditions range for each gear as much as possible equipment increases fuel consumption. z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving with uniform engine speeds. Drive as on poor roads and winter driving all z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads often as possible in top gear, select the increase fuel consumption. next higher gear as soon as possible, (e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear and only change down when the engine window) when not needed. Fuel consumption increases dramatically is no longer running perfectly smoothly. in urban traffic and at winter Roof racks, ski-holders temperatures, especially on short trips High speed z Due to air resistance, a roof load when the engine operating temperature z The higher the speed, the higher the can increase fuel consumption by is not reached. consumption and the noise level. At top approx. 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100 km). z Follow the hints given above to keep speed, you consume a great deal of fuel z Remove them if they are not being used. consumption to a minimum under such and produce excessive noise and conditions. exhaust emissions. 200 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling Fuel consumption, Fuel consumption Fuel for petrol engines Fuel consumption is determined under Commercially available high-quality fuels fuel, refuelling specific driving conditions – see page 313. are suitable (catalytic converter – Special equipment increases the weight of see page 203, octane numbers – the vehicle. As a result, they can increase see pages 308, 309). Fuel quality has a fuel consumption and reduce the specified decisive influence on the power output, maximum speed. running behaviour and service life of the engine. The additives contained in the fuel For the first few thousand miles, friction play an important role in this regard. You between the engine and transmission should therefore only use high-quality fuels components is higher. This increases fuel containing additives. consumption. Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pinking. Vauxhall cannot be held liable for resulting damage. Petrol with a higher octane number can always be used. Fuel consumption ...... 200 Pump nozzles for leaded fuel cannot be Fuel for petrol engines ...... 200 inserted into the filler neck of vehicles that Fuel for diesel engines...... 201 operate on unleaded fuel. Fuel filler cap...... 201 The ignition timing adjusts automatically Refuelling...... 201 to the grade of fuel used (octane number) – see pages 308, 309. Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95 will ensure economical driving. For vehicles with Z20 LEH1) engine, use of 95 RON fuel reduces performance and torque.

1) Sales designation – see page 308. Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling 201

Fuel for diesel engines Fuel filler cap Diesel engines must be operated only on If replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use commercially available diesel fuel meeting a genuine Vauxhall fuel filler cap for your the specifications of DIN EN 590. model to ensure full functionality. Diesel- Since January 2004, some oil companies engined vehicles have special fuel filler have mixed their diesel fuel with upto 5% caps. Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in accordance with the current DIN EN 590 and does not harm the fuel / injection system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not differ from conventional diesel fuel and do not influence the vehicle’s driveability. Picture no: 17197t.tif Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME Refuelling according to DIN EN 590 must not be 9 Warning confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not to be used in Vauxhall engines. Care must be taken when handling fuel. The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are Before refuelling, switch off the engine temperature-dependent. and where applicable any auxiliary Diesel fuels with improved low temperature heating with combustion chambers (see properties are therefore available on the sticker on fuel filler cap). Switch off market during the winter months. Make mobile phones. sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather 6 season. Additives can be used with diesel fuels with winter properties that are guaranteed by the manufacturer and when using diesel fuel filters that are heated depending on the outside temperature. 202 Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling

Correct filling depends to a large extent on 9 Warning proper operation of the fuel dispensing pump: Fuel is flammable and explosive. avoid naked flames or sparks when handling 1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch it fuel or just in its vicinity. Do not smoke. on. This also applies where fuel is perceptible 2. After automatic switch off, the specified only from its characteristic odour. If fuel tank capacity is reached after continued, odours occur in the vehicle itself, measured filling. Leave the filler nozzle in eliminate the cause immediately. We place until the stop. recommend your Vauxhall Authorised To close, position the fuel filler cap and Repairer. rotate past the resistance until the cap audibly clicks over the retainer. Picture no: 17198t.tif Close fuel tank cover. Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle. Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately. The tank flap is locked together with the doors – see page 76. Open the tank flap. To open, unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and suspend from the tank flap. The fuel tank has a limiting system which prevents overfilling of the tank. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases 203

Damage to the catalytic converter or the Catalytic converter, vehicle may result if the following points exhaust gases are not observed: z Consult a workshop, such as your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly as possible in the event of misfiring, irregular engine running following a cold start, a significant loss of engine power or other unusual malfunctions which may indicate a fault in the ignition system. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low speed and with a low engine speed. Picture no: 17199t.tif Irregular engine running and a loss of Catalytic converter for petrol engine power when the Electronic engines Stability Programme (ESP®Plus 3) comes Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic into action are the result of operating Catalytic converter for petrol engines 203 converter and parts of the electronic conditions and are therefore of no Catalytic converter for diesel engines 204 system, rendering them inoperative. significance – see page 208. Controlling exhaust emission...... 205 High quality fuels other than those listed on 6 Exhaust gases...... 206 pages 200 and 308 (e. g. LRP1)) could Maintenance ...... 207 damage the catalytic converter. On vehicles with a catalytic converter, the fuel tank filler neck is of a narrow design so that a dispensing pump for leaded fuel cannot be inserted.

1) LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol. 204 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases z If unburnt fuel enters the catalytic z If the emission control indicator Z Catalytic converter for diesel converter, this may result in overheating flashes, slow down until the flashing engines and irreparable damage to the catalytic stops and the control indicator is steady. Damage to the catalytic converter or the converter. Consult a workshop immediately. We vehicle may result if the following points recommend your Vauxhall Authorised You should therefore avoid are not observed: Repairer. For emission control unnecessarily long use of the starter indicator Z – see page 205. z Consult a workshop, such as your when starting-off, running the tank dry Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, as quickly (an irregular fuel supply will lead to as possible in the event of irregular overheating) and starting the engine engine running, a significant loss of by pushing or towing. engine power or other unusual malfunctions. If necessary, driving may be continued for a short time at a low speed and with a low engine speed. Irregular engine running and a loss of engine power when the Electronic Stability Programme (ESP®Plus 3) comes into action are the result of operating conditions and are therefore of no significance – see page 208. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases 205

Flashing with the engine running indicates a fault that may damage the catalytic converter. You can continue to drive without causing damage by slowing down until the flashing stops and the control indicator is steady. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Picture no: 17004t.tif Picture no: 17352t.tif Controlling exhaust emission Control indicator Z for exhaust Through design-related measures – mainly Illuminates when the ignition is switched on in the area of the fuel-injection and ignition and during the start attempt. Goes off systems – the proportion of noxious shortly after the engine starts running. materials in the exhaust, such as carbon If it illuminates while the engine running monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) and there is a fault in the emission control nitrogen oxides (NOx), is reduced to a system. The permitted emission values minimum. may be exceeded. Consult a workshop immediately. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 206 Catalytic converter, exhaust gases

If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it Exhaust gases is of no significance. Illumination of A could indicate the 9 Warning presence of water in the diesel fuel filter 3. Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous A text message will appear in the service carbon monoxide, which is colourless and display at the same time – see page 44. odourless and could be fatal if inhaled. Have the fuel filter checked for moisture. We recommend that you consult your If exhaust fumes penetrate the vehicle Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. interior, open the windows and consult a workshop immediately. We recommend If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. there is a fault in the electronic immobiliser system. The engine cannot be started – During the first drive smoke may develop see page 67. Picture no: 17028t.tif because of wax and oil evaporating on the Control indicator A for engine exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the electronics open for a while after the first drive and Illuminates for a few seconds after the avoid inhaling the fumes. ignition is switched on. If it illuminates when the engine is running, there is a fault in engine or transmission electronics. The electronic system switches to an emergency running programme. Fuel consumption may be increased and the driveability of the vehicle may be impaired. In some cases, the fault can be remedied by switching the engine off and on again. If the control indicator illuminates again when the engine is running, consult a workshop to have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases 207

Maintenance You are thereby making an important Have all maintenance work carried out at contribution towards keeping the air clean the intervals specified by Vauxhall. We and compliance with emissions legislation. recommend that you entrust this work to Checking and adjustment of the fuel- your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who injection and ignition systems is part of the has proper equipment and trained scope of a Service. For this reason you personnel available. Electronic testing should have all maintenance work carried systems permit rapid diagnosis and out at the intervals specified in your Service remedy of faults. This way you can be Booklet. certain that all components of the vehicle’s electrical, injection and ignition systems operate correctly, that your vehicle has a low level of pollutant emission and that the catalytic converter system will have a long service life. 208 Drive control systems

Drive control systems Interactive Driving System ESPPlus is ready for operation as soon as (IDS+) 3 the ignition is switched on and control indicator v goes out. IDS+ unites the sensors and control units Plus of the Electronic Stability Programme When the ESP comes into action, (ESPPlus), Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and v flashes. Continuous Damping Control (CDC). The vehicle is now in a critical situation; This provides both excellent driving ESPPlus allows you to keep control of the dynamics and greater safety. vehicle and reminds you to match your speed to the road conditions. Electronic Stability Programme (ESPPlus) 3 9 Warning ESPPlus improves driving stability when necessary in any driving situation Do not let this special safety feature regardless of the type of road surface or tempt you into taking risks when driving. tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels Traffic safety can only be achieved by Interactive Driving System ...... 208 from spinning. adopting a responsible driving style. Electronic Stability Programme ...... 208 The system monitors vehicle movements. Continuous Damping Control 3 ...... 210 As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve 3 SPORT mode ...... 210 (understeers / oversteers) engine output is Cruise control 3 ...... 212 reduced (the sound of the engine changes) Parking distance sensors 3...... 214 and individual wheels are specifically Automatic Level Control 3 ...... 216 braked. This considerably improves the Deflation Detection System ...... 217 driving stability of the vehicle on snow and Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 ... 218 ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces. Drive control systems 209

Illuminates while driving The system is switched off or a fault is present. Continued driving is possible. The driving stability can however deteriorate depending on road surface conditions. Reactivate ESPPlus or have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allow faults to be quickly remedied. Switching off 3 With SPORT mode 3 engaged (LED in SPORT button illuminated), the ESPPlus can Picture no: 17200t.tif Picture no: 17961t.tif be disengaged for sports performance. Plus Control indicator v Hold the SPORT button depressed for ESP is reactivated by pressing the Illuminates for a few seconds when the around 4 seconds. Control indicator v will SPORT button again or switching on the ignition is switched on. The system is now illuminate. ESP off will also appear in the ignition. ready for operation. service display – see page 44. SPORT mode – see page 210. Flashing during driving This shows the system has come into 9 Warning action. The engine output may be reduced Plus (the sound of the engine changes) and the ESP should not be deactivated if there vehicle may be braked automatically to a is one of the run-flat tyres 3 has no small degree. pressure. 210 Drive control systems

Continuous Damping Control 3 SPORT mode 3 (CDC) SPORT mode is used to change CDC adapts vehicle damping to the current damping 3, steering 3, throttle driving situation and road conditions. application 3 and the shift point for automatic transmission and Easytronic 3 The system continually monitors wheel and while driving. vehicle movements and immediately modifies the damping of each shock Damping and steering become more direct absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally and provide better contact with the road adapted to the driving situation and road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to conditions. accelerator movements. When SPORT mode is engaged, the For automatic transmission 3 and damping control is adapted to a sportier Easytronic 3, the shift times are reduced and gear changes occur at a higher engine driving style ("harder" chassis calibration). Picture no: 17201t.tif speed (except when cruise control is on). SPORT mode – see right column. Control indicator IDS+ for Continuous Damping Control (CDC) Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds after the driver’s door is opened. If it illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the system. The system is not operational. For reasons of safety "harder" chassis calibration will be activated. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. Drive control systems 211

To deactivate Briefly press the SPORT button again or switch off the ignition. The LED in the button goes out. A long press deactivates ESP – see page 209. SPORT mode remains engaged. SPORT mode is deactivated if the Winter programme 3 is switched on (vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3). Winter programme – see pages 177, 185, 192.

Picture no: 17961t.tif Picture no: 17201t.tif To activate Control indicator IDS+ for SPORT mode Press the SPORT button. The LED in the Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds when button illuminates. the driver’s door is opened. If it illuminates In vehicles with automatic transmission 3 while driving, there is a fault in the system. or Easytronic 3, control indicator 1 also The system is not operational. Have illuminates. the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall SPORT mode cannot be activated if the Authorised Repairer. The system’s Winter programme 3 is running (vehicles integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to with automatic transmission 3 or be quickly remedied. Easytronic 3). Winter programme – see pages 177, 185, 192. 212 Drive control systems

Cruise control 3 With automatic transmission 3, only use Cruise control can store and maintain cruise control in D or in automatic mode speeds between 20 and 125 mph with Easytronic 3. (30 and 200 km/h). Deviation from the When the cruise control is active, reaction stored speed may occur when driving up or times may be increased due to the different downhill. position of the feet. For safety reasons the cruise control cannot be activated until the foot brake 9 Warning has been operated once. The driver is always responsible for Cruise control is operated with ensuring that vehicle speed is buttons m, g, and § on the turn appropriate for the speed limit and signal stalk. driving conditions – even if cruise control Do not use the cruise control if it is not is engaged. Failure to follow the Picture no: 17202t.tif advisable to maintain a constant speed instructions could lead to injuries or Control indicator m (e.g. in situations presenting a danger to endanger life. When driving, control indicator m will yourself and other road users, in heavy illuminates as soon as the system is traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy switched on. roads). Drive control systems 213

Increase To deactivate With cruise control active, hold down Briefly press button §: cruise control is button m or briefly press it repeatedly: switched off, control indicator m goes out speed is increased continuously or in steps and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the continue driving, depress the accelerator accelerator pedal. pedal in the usual manner. When button m is released the current For reasons of safety, cruise control speed is stored and maintained. deactivates under certain driving Decelerate conditions. With cruise control active, hold down For example: button g or briefly press it repeatedly: z the vehicle’s speed drops below speed is reduced continuously or in steps approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or of 1.2 mph (2 km/h). Picture no: 16990t.tif z the brake pedal is depressed or To activate When button g is released the current z the clutch pedal is depressed or Briefly press button m: the current speed is speed is stored and maintained. stored and maintained. The accelerator z selector lever of automatic pedal can be released. transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N. Vehicle speed can be increased by Resuming the stored speed depressing the accelerator pedal. When Briefly press button g at a speed above the accelerator pedal is released, the 20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected previously stored speed is resumed. before the cruise control was switched off is resumed. The value of the stored speed is deleted when the ignition is turned off. 214 Drive control systems

If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when reversing, a series of signals can be heard in the vehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter as the distance is reduced. If the distance is less than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous. 9 Warning

Under certain circumstances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as well as external noise sources may cause the system to fail to detect obstacles. For this reason, care must be Picture no: 17203t.tif Picture no: 17016t.tif taken when reversing even if the parking Parking distance sensors 3 To activate distance sensors are operational. This is Parking distance sensors make reverse The parking distance sensors activates of particular importance when in the parking easier by measuring the distance automatically when the ignition is switched vicinity of pedestrians. between the vehicle and an obstacle in the on and reverse gear is engaged. rear, and giving an acoustic signal in the Its operational readiness is indicated by To deactivate passenger’s compartment. illumination of the LED in the button. The system deactivates automatically The system records the distance using four when reverse gear is disengaged. sensors in the rear bumper. To deactivate the system when reverse gear is engaged, press button r. The LED in the button goes out. To reactivate, press button r again. Drive control systems 215

If it flashes Caravan / Trailer towing equipment 3, The fault is due to sensors obstructed caravan / trailer towing with snow or ice. The sensors must be The system automatically detects if a undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice. towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle. Interference due to external sources of When towing, parking distance sensors are ultrasound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary automatically deactivated when the trailer machines). Once the source of interference cable is plugged into the socket. is removed, the system will operate Fitting rear load racks 3 normally. Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted near the sensors could disrupt the system. Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on page 149. Picture no: 17204t.tif Control indicator r for parking distance sensors If it is illuminated: Fault in the system. The system is not ready for operation. Have the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be quickly remedied. 216 Drive control systems

The vehicle is automatically raised at the rear, increasing the spring travel and ground clearance. The Automatic Level Control system is activated after approx. 1.8 miles (3 kilometres), depending on the vehicle loading and the nature of the road surface. Headlight range adjustment – see page 136. In the event of malfunctions, do not utilise the vehicle’s full load capacity. Have the cause remedied without delay. We Picture no: 17205t.tif recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Automatic Level Control 3 Authorised Repairer. Automatic Level Control makes it possible to keep the height of the vehicle constant when subjected to different loads in the rear (e.g. when towing a caravan or trailer). This significantly improves driving conditions. Drive control systems 217

Control indicator w If control indicator w illuminates red while driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop immediately and check tyre pressures. A maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) is permitted for run-flat tyres 3. Observe the information on page 231. If control indicator w illuminates yellow, there is a fault in the system. Have the cause of the fault remedied. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to Picture no: 17018t.tif be quickly remedied. Picture no: 17019t.tif Deflation Detection System The control indicator flashes three times System initialisation (DDS) 3 when the system is initialising. After correcting tyre pressure or changing a tyre / wheel, the system must be The Deflation Detection System 9 Warning initialised: continuously monitors the speed of all with the ignition switched on, press the DDS wheels while driving. If a tyre loses The Deflation Detection System does not button for approx. 4 seconds. pressure, it grows smaller and rotates more Control indicator w flashes 3 times. quickly than the other wheels. If the system replace manual checks with a suitable gauge. The system is operational after driving detects a difference in speed, control acertain distance. indicator w illuminates red. Check tyre pressures at least every 14 days and prior to any long journey; Only initialise the system if all tyres have Stop immediately and check tyre pressure. the prescribed pressure. Mount the spare wheel if necessary – the tyres should be checked when cold. 3 see pages 249, 252. Don’t forget to check the spare . The system is operational when the ignition Tyre pressure – see pages 228, 326. is switched on and can detect pressure loss from a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). 218 Drive control systems

Tyre pressure monitoring Once the ignition is switched on, the system system 3 is operational and will continuously The tyre pressure monitoring system monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of Ü Board Computer continually checks the pressure and speed approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above. of all four wheels while driving. 9 Warning BC 1 A pressure sensor is integrated in each BC 2 wheel. Once a minute, the pressure of each The tyre pressure monitoring system does Timer tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is not replace manual checks with a Tyres compared. If the system detects one or suitable gauge. more pressure differences, a message Check tyre pressures at least every appears on the information display. 14 days and prior to any long journey; In vehicles with Graphical Information the tyres should be checked when cold. 3 3 Display or Colour Information Display Don’t forget to check the spare 3. Picture no: 17334t.tif and trip computer 3, current tyre pressures Display of current tyre pressure 3 can be shown in the information display. Tyre pressure – see pages 228, 326. Select menu item Tyres from the Board For the system to be operational, all wheels Computer menu. must be equipped with pressure sensors The current pressure of each tyre is and all tyres must be filled to the displayed. prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure monitoring system automatically detects if Warning messages the vehicle is being driven with a load of up A message is given on the information to 3 persons or a full load. display to warn of inconsistent tyre pressures. In some versions, the message is displayed in abbreviated form. For example, the following messages can be displayed: Drive control systems 219

Mount the spare wheel if necessary – see pages 249, 252. A maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) is permitted for run-flat Navi active Navi active tyres 3. Observe the information on page 231. Tyre pressure Attention! On the Colour Information Display this report will appear in red. check rear Front left tyre left tyre pressure loss Acknowledgement of warnings – (value in bar) (value in bar) see page 54.

OK OK

Picture no: 17353t.tif Picture no: 17354t.tif A graphic 3 indicating the left rear tyre is A graphic 3 indicating the front left tyre is shown together with the current tyre shown together with the current tyre pressure: slight pressure deviation. Reduce pressure: significant pressure deviation or speed. Check pressure at next opportunity direct pressure loss! Steer out of flow of with appropriate gauge and correct if traffic as quickly as possible without necessary. endangering other drivers. Stop and check On the Colour Information Display this the tyres. report will appear in yellow. 220 Drive control systems

General information The spare wheel / temporary spare is not equipped with a pressure sensor. The tyre pressure monitoring system is not operational if the spare wheel / temporary spare is in use. Control indicator w illuminates yellow –.– appears in the display of tyre pressures. Tyre pressure is monitored by the Deflation Detection System – see page 217. If a complete set of wheels without tyre pressure control system sensors is mounted (e.g. four winter tyres), no error message Picture no: 17018t.tif Picture no: 17019t.tif will be displayed. The tyre pressure Control indicator w System initialisation monitoring system is not operational. If control indicator w illuminates yellow The system must be initialised after The tyre pressure of a set of wheels while driving, there is a fault in the tyre a wheel / tyre change: without sensors is monitored by the pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel with the ignition switched on, press Deflation Detection System (DDS) – without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel) button DDS approx. 4 seconds. Control see page 217. will also generate a fault in the system. indicator w flashes 3 times. The system Have the cause of the fault remedied. We is operational after driving a certain recommend that you consult your Vauxhall distance. Authorised Repairer. The system’s Only initialise the system if all tyres have integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to the prescribed pressure (check when tyres be quickly remedied. are cold). Drive control systems 221

Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring The tyre pressure monitoring system valve system can be retro-fitted. We recommend cores and sealing rings must be replaced that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised each time the tyres are changed. We Repairer. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall When manually checking tyre pressure with Authorised Repairer. a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto The use of commercially available liquid the valve. Tyre pressure – see page 326. filled run-flat systems or repair kits can impair the function of the system. Vauxhall-approved systems can be used. Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, walkie-talkies) operated in the area could cause interference in the tyre pressure monitoring system. 222 Brakes Brakes Brake system The effectiveness of the brakes is an important factor for traffic safety. To improve effectiveness, do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km) after new brake pads have been fitted. Brake pad wear must not exceed a specified limit. Regular maintenance as detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore of the utmost importance for traffic safety. Have worn brake pads replaced. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Picture no: 17206t.tif Authorised Repairer, who will fit pads that Brake assist Brake system...... 222 have been tested and approved by Rapid powerful application of the brake Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)...... 224 Vauxhall and guarantee optimum braking pedal automatically applies maximum power. braking force amplification to achieve the Brake pads worn to their minimum shortest possible braking distance under thickness generate a grinding noise. full braking (brake assistant). Continued driving is possible. Have the Maintain steady pressure on the brake brake pads replaced as soon as possible pedal for as long as full-on braking is to by a workshop. We recommend your continue. When the brake pedal is Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. released, the maximum brake force amplification is taken away. Adaptive brake light During full-on braking, all three brake lights flash for the duration of ABS control. Brakes 223

Foot brake Check the brake lights before starting out The foot brake comprises two independent on a journey. On vehicles with check brake circuits. control 3 the brake lights are checked automatically – see page 62. If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still be braked using the other brake circuit. If this Shortly after starting each journey the occurs, however, the brake pedal must be effectiveness of the brake system should depressed quite far using considerable be tested at low speed and without force before braking effect occurs. The inconveniencing other traffic, especially if distance required for braking will be the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle greater. Consult a workshop before has been washed. continuing your journey. We recommend The brake fluid level should be checked your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low To ensure the full pedal travel can be and the handbrake is not applied, control utilized, especially in case of a fault in one indicator R on the instrument panel Picture no: 17207t.tif of the brake circuits, there must be no mats illuminates – see page 38. Handbrake in the vicinity of the pedals – see page 197. Always apply handbrake firmly. On slopes Hill Start Assist 3 (HSA) apply the handbrake as firmly as possible. When the engine is not running, the The system helps pull away on inclines. assistance of the brake servo unit After releasing the footbrake, if the The mechanical handbrake acts on the disappears once the brake pedal has been handbrake is not applied the brakes are brakes on the rear wheels. It engages depressed once or twice. Braking effect is only released after 2 seconds. As soon as automatically when applied. not reduced, but braking requires the acceleration is sufficient to prevent To release the handbrake pull the lever up significantly greater force. This is especially rolling back, the brake is released. slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully important to bear in mind when towing. lower the lever. To reduce the operating forces of the handbrake, depress the foot brake at the same time. 224 Brakes

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u) ABS continually monitors the brake system 9 Warning and prevents the wheels from locking For optimum braking, keep the brake regardless of the type of road surface or pedal fully depressed throughout the tyre grip. braking process, despite the fact that the It starts to regulate the braking pressure as pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock. pressure on the pedal. The vehicle remains steerable, even in the Do not let this special safety feature event of very heavy braking, for instance tempt you into taking risks when driving. on bends or when swerving to avoid an obstacle. Even in the case of full-on Traffic safety can only be achieved by braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive adopting a responsible driving style. round an obstacle without releasing the Picture no: 17208t.tif brakes. Brake system control indicator R The control indicator illuminates when the ABS control is made apparent through a ignition is switched on if the handbrake is pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is the regulation process. too low. Brake fluid – see page 296. 9 Warning

If the control indicator illuminates when the handbrake is not applied: stop. Interrupt your journey immediately. Consult a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Brakes 225

Have the cause of the fault remedied. We 9 Warning recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The system’s If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may integrated self-diagnostics allows faults to be subject to locking due to braking that be quickly remedied. is heavier than normal. The advantages of ABS are no longer operational.

You can continue driving, provided you drive with care and anticipation.

Picture no: 17209t.tif Control indicator u for ABS The control indicator illuminates for several seconds when the ignition is switched on and the system undergoes a self-check at the same time (may be audible). The system is ready for operation when the control indicator goes out. If the control indicator does not go out after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation. 226 Wheels, tyres

Wheels, tyres Tyres Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring See page 326 for suitable tyres and system 3 restrictions. If winter tyres or tyres of a different size are fitted, tyre pressure monitoring system Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to sensors can be retro-fitted if so desired. the chassis and provide optimum driving Otherwise, the system will not indicate tyre comfort and safety. pressure deviations. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Changing tyre / wheel type Repairer. Before switching to different tyres or Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 – wheels, seek advice on the technical see page 217. possibilities. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – who will be able to advise you of any see page 218. necessary modifications. Vehicles with run-flat tyres 3 If tyres of a different size than those fitted When switching wheels, e.g. when Tyres ...... 226 at the factory are used, the electronic switching to winter tyres, use run-flat tyres Changing tyre / wheel type...... 226 speedometer may require reprogramming as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair kit Tyre pressure...... 228 to ensure that the correct speed is in the vehicle. Tyre condition, wheel condition ...... 229 displayed. Run-flat tyres 3 – see page 231. Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3...... 231 Winter tyres 3 ...... 232 9 Warning Wheel covers 3 ...... 232 Tyre chains...... 232 Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may lead to accidents and render the vehicle unroadworthy. Wheels, tyres 227

Fitting new tyres Run-flat tyres 3 must not be combined with Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even conventional tyres. for alloy wheels to protect against better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are damage. If wheel trim is used on steel z the same size, 9 Warning wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the z the same design, following specification must be followed: z We recommend that you have your tyres the same make, z Use of wheel trims and tyres that z changed by your Vauxhall Authorised and have the same tread pattern. approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in Repairer, who will be familiar with the Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the question and thereby fulfil all requirements of the law as regards direction of travel. The rolling direction is requirements for the wheel and tyre disposal of tyres and can thus help to indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on combination. protect the environment and your health. the sidewall. z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be have a beaded edge. refitted as soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design 9 Warning properties of the tyre. Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims could lead to sudden loss of air and thereby accidents. 228 Wheels, tyres

Picture no: 17211t.tif Picture no: 17212t.tif Picture no: 17213t.tif Tyre pressure In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring After having checked the tyre pressure, Check tyre pressure, including the spare system 3 there is an adapter in the valve tighten the valve caps using the valve wheel, at least every 14 days and prior cap key. Screw adapter to valve before cap key. to any long journey; the tyres should be attaching tyre pressure gauge – Incorrect inflation pressures will impair checked when cold. Don’t forget to check see page 218. safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel the spare. Tyre pressure – see page 326. economy and will increase tyre wear. Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres If the pressure is too low, this can result in the valve caps easier. The key is located on are warm. Otherwise the pressure may considerable tyre warm-up and internal the inside of the tank flap. drop below the permissible minimum damage, leading to tread separation and when the tyres cool down. even to tyre blow-out at high speeds. Wheels, tyres 229

Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by Check tyres regularly for damage (foreign adjusting the inflation pressure. bodies, punctures, cuts, cracks, bulges in sidewalls). Check wheels for damage. In 9 Warning the event of damage or abnormal wear, consult a workshop. We recommend your Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. tyre. 9 Warning

Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.

Picture no: 17214t.tif Tyre condition, wheel condition Drive over edges slowly and at a right angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel damage which is only noticed later on. When parking, ensure that the tyres are not pressed against the edge of the kerb. 230 Wheels, tyres

General information z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if the tyres are worn. z Tyres age, even if they are used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not been used for six years should be used with care. z Never fit used tyres the previous history and use of which you do not know. z So as not to impair brake cooling, use only wheel trims approved for use on your vehicle. Picture no: 17215t.tif Picture no: 17216t.tif Tread depth The legally permissible minimum tread Check tread depth regularly. depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of If wear in the front is greater than that in 1) the rear, move the rear wheels to the front the wear indicators (TWI ). A number of axle and vice versa. wear indicators are spaced at equal intervals around the tyre within the tread. Correct tyre pressure. For vehicles with Their position is indicated by markings on Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 or tyre the tyre sidewall. pressure control system 3, initialise the system – see pages 217, 220. For reasons of safety, tyres should be replaced when their tread depth has worn down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).

1) TWI = Tread Wear Indicator. Wheels, tyres 231

Tyre designations Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3 Driving with a damaged tyre Meanings: Run-flat tyres have reinforced, self- A loss in tyre pressure is indicated by the 3 e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H supporting sidewalls, which ensure that the tyre pressure monitoring system or the tyres always have a certain amount of Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3. 195 =Tyre width in mm driveability, even when there is no pressure. 65 =Aspect ratio If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving (tyre height to tyre width) in % Run-flat tyres are only permitted on is possible R =Belt type: Radial vehicles with ESPPlus and tyre pressure z at a speed of max. 50 mph (80 km/h), 15 = Rim diameter in inches monitoring system or Deflation Detection z up to a distance of 50 miles (80 km). 91 = Load index System (DDS) 3. e.g.: 91 represents 618 kg 9 Warning H = Speed code 9 Warning When driving with a flat tyre, do not Speed code letters: Even the tyre pressure of run-flat tyres exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or a Q Up to 100 mph (160 km/h) must be checked regularly. distance of 50 miles (80 km). S Up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Check tyre pressures at least every 14 The vehicle will be more difficult to steer T Up to 118 mph (190 km/h) days and prior to any long journey; the and handle and the braking distance will H Up to 130 mph (210 km/h) tyres should be checked when cold. be longer. V Up to 150 mph (240 km/h) W Up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Depending on the manufacturer, run-flat Adapt driving style and speed to the tyres can be recognised by the designation conditions at hand. ROF or SSR on the sidewall. They are only Do not use a tyre repair kit. permitted in combination with Vauxhall- approved alloy wheels. This also applies Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 – to winter tyres. see page 217. Tyre pressure monitoring system 3 – see page 218. 232 Wheels, tyres

Winter tyres 3 Wheel covers 3 For notes on fitting new tyres – If the wheel trims and tyres used are not see page 226. Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the Limitations – see pages 231, 326. tyres do not have a beaded edge – see page 227. Winter tyres improve safety at temperatures below 7 °C and should therefore be fitted on all the wheels. The design of summer tyres means they have limited qualities for winter driving. If the maximum permissible speed for the winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle, a notice indicating the maximum permissible speed for the tyres must be Picture no: 17217t.tif affixed within the driver’s field of vision1). Tyre chains See page 326 for restrictions. If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive driveability may be affected, especially on wheels (front axle). slippery road surfaces. Obtain a Always use fine mesh chains that add no replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the possible, and have the wheel balanced inboard sides (including chain lock). and fitted to the vehicle. We recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

1) Varies from country to country on account of national regulations. Wheels, tyres 233

Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into Temporary spare wheel contact with parts of the chain and be Tyre chains must not be used on the damaged. Remove the wheel trim – temporary spare wheel. If you need to use see page 252. tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up fit the temporary spare on the rear axle to 30 mph (50 km/h) and, when travelling and transfer one of the rear wheels to the on roads that are free of snow, they may be front axle. used for brief periods only since they are For notes on the temporary spare wheel – subject to rapid wear on a hard road and see page 250. may snap. Wheel changing – see page 252. Correct tyre pressure. Deflation Detection System (DDS) 3 – see page 217. Tyre pressure control system 3 – see page 218. 234 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing

Roof racks, 9 Warning caravan and trailer Disregard of these notes can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle towing passengers must be informed accordingly.

Roof racks 3 For reasons of safety and to avoid damaging the roof, we recommend that you use the Vauxhall roof rack system approved for your vehicle. Consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Picture no: 17218t.tif Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra Model variants without roof railing TwinTop. Lift the covers from the fitting openings. Fasten the roof rack following the Attach roof rack at appropriate points, 3 Roof racks ...... 234 instructions that accompany the system. see enclosed roof luggage rack system Towing equipment 3...... 235 instructions. Driving hints – see page 196. Towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar 3...... 235 Stowage of coupling ball bar ...... 238 Caravan and trailer loads...... 239 Coupling socket load...... 240 Rear axle load during towing...... 240 Tyre pressure...... 240 Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA)...... 240 Driving characteristics, towing tips .... 241 Starting on inclines ...... 242 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing 235

Towing equipment 3 Use only towing equipment that has been approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting the retro-fitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will advise you on any possible towed load increases. Your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer has instructions on how to install the towing equipment and make any necessary changes to the vehicle that affect the cooling system, heat shields or other equipment. Picture no: 17219t.tif Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on Picture no: 17220t.tif Model variants with roof railing 3 page 149. Towing equipment with Attach roof rack to roof railing at points detachable coupling ball bar 3 shown in illustration, see enclosed roof Do not mount towing equipment to vehicles with Z 20 LEH1) engine. Stowage of coupling ball bar luggage rack system instructions. In Hatchbacks, the coupling ball bar is in a 9 Warning pouch, fastened in the luggage compartment cargo box with a strap – The coupling ball bar is to be removed see page 238. when not towing. In Estates, the coupling ball bar is fastened with a strap in a compartment in the spare For installation dimensions of the trailer wheel well of the luggage compartment. towing equipment – see pages 339, 340. 6

1) Sales designation – see page 308. 236 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing

Picture no: 17221t.tif Picture no: 17222t.tif Picture no: 17223t.tif Fitting the coupling ball bar Checking the tensioning of the coupling Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be Disengage and fold down the socket. ball bar tensioned before it is inserted into the Remove the sealing plug from the hole for z Red marking on turn knob points coupling housing: the coupling ball bar and stow it in the towards white marking on coupling z Unlock coupling ball bar (key to luggage compartment. ball bar. position 1) – see Fig. 17222 T. z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between z Pull turn knob out and then turn it rotary knob and coupling ball bar. clockwise as far as it will go – see z Key is in lock at position 1. Fig. 17223 T. Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing 237

Important Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly attached: z Green marking on turn knob points towards white marking on coupling ball bar. z No gap between turn knob and coupling ball bar. z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly in coupling housing. z Coupling ball bar must be locked and key must be removed. Picture no: 17224t.tif Picture no: 17225t.tif Inserting the coupling ball bar Lock coupling ball bar (key to position 2 – 9 Warning Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar into see page 236, Fig. 17222 T). Remove key the coupling housing and push firmly and press protective flap into position. Towing a caravan / trailer is only upwards until the coupling ball bar When the coupling ball bar is locked the permitted with a properly attached engages in position. turn knob can no longer be pulled out. coupling ball bar. If the coupling ball bar The turn knob snaps back into its home cannot be properly attached, consult a position resting against the coupling ball workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall bar. Authorised Repairer.

9 Warning Eye for break-away stopping cable In the case of caravans / trailers with brake, Do not touch the turn knob when attach the break-away stopping cable to inserting the coupling ball bar - risk of the eye (arrow in Fig. 17225 T). injury. 238 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing

Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket – see page 236, Fig. 17221 T. Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other high-pressure cleaners to clean the coupling ball bar.

Picture no: 17226t.tif Picture no: 17220t.tif Dismounting the coupling ball bar Stowage of coupling ball bar Unlock coupling ball bar (key to Hatchback position 1 – see page 236, Fig. 17222 T). Stow the coupling ball bar in the pouch Pull out turn knob and then turn it clockwise and fasten it in the luggage compartment as far as it will go. Pull coupling ball bar cargo box with the strap. down out of the coupling housing and stow Estate in compartment in the luggage Stow the coupling ball bar in the compartment – see page 235. compartment in the spare wheel well of the luggage compartment, fastening it with the strap. Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing 239

Caravan and trailer loads1) The permissible caravan / trailer load The actual caravan / trailer load plus the The permissible caravan / trailer loads are should be fully utilised only by drivers who actual gross weight of the towing vehicle vehicle-dependent and engine-dependent are adequately experienced in towing must not exceed the maximum permitted maximum values which must not be large or heavy caravans / trailers. towing weight. For example, if the exceeded. The actual caravan / trailer load The permitted caravan / trailer load permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised, is the difference between the actual gross applies up to the specified incline and up to the caravan / trailer load must only be used weight of the caravan / trailer and the an altitude of 1000 metres above sea-level. until the maximum permitted towing actual coupling socket load with the Since engine power decreases as altitude weight is reached. The maximum caravan / trailer coupled. When the increases because of the air becoming permitted towing weight is shown on caravan / trailer load is being checked, thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, the identification plate - see page 306. therefore, only the caravan / trailer wheels the permitted towing weight also – and not the jockey wheel – must be decreases by 10 % for every 1000 metres of standing on the weighing apparatus. additional altitude. The towing weight The permissible caravan / trailer loads for does not have to be reduced when driving your vehicle are given in the vehicle on roads with slight inclines (less than 8 %, documents. Unless otherwise stated, they e.g. motorways). are valid for gradients up to max. 12 %.

1) Observe national regulations. 240 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing

Coupling socket load Rear axle load during towing The coupling socket load is the load With a trailer coupled and the towing exerted by the caravan / trailer on the vehicle fully loaded (including all coupling ball. It can be varied by changing occupants), the permissible rear axle the weight distribution when loading the load (see identification plate or vehicle caravan / trailer. documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg The maximum permissible coupling socket and the permissible Gross Vehicle Weight load (75 kg) is specified on the towing by 45 kg for the Hatchback. For the Estate, equipment identification plate and in the the permissible rear axle load may be vehicle documents. Always aim for the exceeded by 60 kg and the permissible maximum load, especially in the case of Gross Vehicle Weight by 30 kg. If the heavy caravans / trailers. The coupling permissible rear axle load is exceeded socket load should never fall below 25 kg. a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) applies (50 mph (80 km/h) if approved for Picture no: 17213t.tif When measuring the coupling socket load, use as a commercial vehicle). If national Tyre pressure make sure that the drawbar of the loaded regulations specify a lower maximum caravan / trailer is at the same height as it speed for vehicles towing a trailer, this Increase the tyre pressure on the towing will be when the caravan / trailer is coupled must be observed. vehicle to the value specified for a full with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly load – see page 326. Check the pressure important for caravans / trailers with of the spare wheel and caravan / trailer tandem axle. wheels. Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA) Trailer Stability Assist monitors vehicle movements when towing a caravan or trailer. If the system detects lurching movements, engine power is reduced and the vehicle / trailer combination is selectively braked until the lurching ceases. Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing 241

Parking distance sensors 3 are If the caravan / trailer starts to sway, drive deactivated when towing. more slowly, do not attempt to correct the Handling is greatly influenced by the steering and brake sharply if necessary. loading of the caravan / trailer. Loads If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully, should therefore be secured so that they depress the brake pedal as hard as cannot slip and be placed in the centre of possible. the caravan / trailer if possible, i.e. above Remember that the braking distance for the axle. vehicles towing caravans / trailers with and In the case of trailers with low driving without brake is always greater than that stability or caravans with a permitted for vehicles not towing a caravan / trailer. gross vehicle weight of over 1300 kg (Hatchback) / 1200 kg (Estate), do not 6 exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h); the Picture no: 17227t.tif use of a friction-type stabiliser is highly Driving characteristics, recommended. towing tips Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) In the case of caravans / trailers with if possible, even in countries where higher brakes, attach breakaway stopping cable speeds are permitted. to eye. Make sure that you have enough room Before attaching the caravan / trailer, when cornering and avoid sudden lubricate the ball of the caravan / trailer manoeuvres. towing device. However, do not lubricate the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ball, is being used to damp snaking. Check caravan / trailer lighting before starting to drive. The fog tail light on the vehicle is deactivated when towing a caravan / trailer. Trailers with LED turn signals must have a provision enables light monitoring for commercial bulbs. Turn signal control indicator – see page 40. 242 Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing

When driving downhill, the brakes are Before starting-off under extreme under considerably more load when towing conditions (high combination weight, a caravan / trailer. For this reason, drive in mountainous terrain with steep inclines), the same gear as if driving uphill and drive switch off all unnecessary electrical loads at a similar speed. (e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning 3 3 Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 system , heated front seats ). in automatic mode will automatically select the driving programme with the optimum engine braking effect. Gear position 3, 2 or 1 can also be manually selected if required. The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of Picture no: 17228t.tif the engine speed. Starting on inclines Since a considerable amount of heat is For vehicles with manual transmission, generated at high engine speeds and less the most favourable engine speed when at slower speeds, do not shift down when starting-off on an incline is between climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping 2500 and 3000 rpm for petrol engines with the gradient in the higher gear. and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release handbrake and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop during this procedure. For vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in automatic mode, apply full throttle. Self-help 243 Self-help Starting 9 Warning Do not start with quick charger This prevents damage to electronic Disregard of these notes can lead to components. Starting the engine with jump leads 3 244 injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle Towing the vehicle...... 245 passengers must be informed Do not start by pushing or towing Towing service ...... 246 accordingly. Because your vehicle is fitted with a Towing another vehicle...... 247 catalytic converter, it must not be started Warning triangle ¨ 3...... 248 Diesel fuel system, bleeding by pushing or towing – see page 203. First-aid kit (cushion) + 3...... 248 Never let the tank run dry! If control Vehicle with the Open&Start system 3 must Y Stowing in the luggage compartment 249 indicator illuminates, refuel as soon as not be started by pushing or towing if the Jack £3 and vehicle tools 3 ...... 251 possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes. battery is discharged, since the steering Changing wheels ...... 252 It is possible to restart the engine if the tank column lock cannot be released. Tyre repair kit 3...... 256 has been run dry. A delayed start is to be The vehicle can only be started using jump Electrical system ...... 260 expected. Switch on the ignition three times leads – see following page. for approx. 15 seconds. Then attempt to Fuses and the most important 1) circuits they protect ...... 261 start the engine for approx. 40 seconds . If the engine does not start, wait at Bulb replacement ...... 268 least 5 minutes and try again. If the engine Halogen headlight system...... 268 does not start, consult a workshop. We Xenon headlight system 3, recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Adaptive Forward Lighting Repairer. system 3 ...... 272 Front indicator lights ...... 275 Front fog lights 3...... 275 Tail lights ...... 276 Number plate light ...... 285 Courtesy lights ...... 286

1) For engine Z 17 DTH: for technical reasons, only possible for 30 seconds. Sales designation – see page 309. 244 Self-help

Starting the engine with jump z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage leads 3 (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be A vehicle with a discharged battery can be considerably less than that of the started using jump leads and the battery of discharged battery. Voltage and another vehicle. capacity information can be found on the batteries. Attempts to start the vehicle should be z Use jump leads with insulated terminals made at intervals of one minute and 2 should not last longer than 15 seconds. and a cross section of at least 16 mm (25 mm2 for diesel engines). 9 Warning z Do not disconnect the discharged battery from the vehicle. This must be done with extreme care. Any z Switch off all unnecessary electrical deviation from the following instructions consumers. could lead to personal injury or damage Picture no: 17229t.tif resulting from battery explosion, as well z Never expose the battery to naked z Do not lean over the battery during jump as to damage to the electrical systems in flames or sparks. starting. both vehicles. z A discharged batter can freeze at z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to temperatures of 0 °C. Defrost the frozen touch those of the other lead. battery in a warm room before z Do not touch the vehicles while jump connecting jump leads. starting. z Do not allow battery fluid to come into z Apply handbrake. Manual transmission contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic painted surfaces. The fluid contains transmission 3 in P. sulphuric acid which can cause injuries and damage in the event of direct contact. z Wear eye protection and protective clothing when handling a battery. Self-help 245

z Do not connect leads to negative terminal of discharged battery! z The connection point should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z Route the leads so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compartment. z Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump start. z After 5 minutes, start the other engine. Attempts to start the vehicle should be Picture no: 17230t.tif made at intervals of one minute and Picture no: 17231t.tif Connect the leads in the order shown in the should not last longer than 15 seconds. Towing the vehicle illustration: z After starting, allow both engines to idle To open the cover concealing the towing 1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to for approx. 3 minutes with the leads eye socket at the front right of the vehicle: the positive terminal 1 of the battery connected. disengage the cover at the bottom and pull providing the jump start (identified by it off downwards. z In order to avoid excess voltage in the "+" sign on battery case or terminal). electrical system, before removing a The towing eye is found in the stowage 2. Connect the other end of this lead to the lead, switch on an electrical consumer compartment for the jack 3 and vehicle 3 positive terminal 2 of the discharged (e.g. lights, heated rear window) in the located under the spare wheel or in the battery ("+" sign). vehicle receiving the jump start. stowage compartment together with the tyre repair kit 3 under the floor cover. 3. Connect the first end of the other jump z Reverse above sequence exactly when lead to the negative terminal 3 of the removing leads. Jack and vehicle tools – see page 251. battery providing the start ("–" sign). Tyre repair kit 3 – see page 256. 4. Connect the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other 6 vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. 246 Self-help

Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in Vehicles with automatic transmission 3 neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N. should be towed facing forward only and Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive must not be towed faster than 50 mph tractive force can damage the vehicle. (80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km). If the transmission is defective, or if the 9 Warning above speed or distance is to be exceeded, the front axle must be raised off the Significantly greater force is required for ground. braking: the brake servo unit is only Consult a workshop. We recommend your operational when the engine is running. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will Considerably greater steering force is serve you best to get your vehicle back on necessary since this unit is operative only the road. when the engine is running. If the automatic clutch has been manually Picture no: 17232t.tif released in vehicles with Easytronic 3 Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from because of an interruption to the power as it will go until it stops in a horizontal the towing vehicle, switch on the air supply, towing is not permitted – position. recirculation 3 and close the windows. see page 180. In this case, consult a Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a workshop as soon as possible. We tow rod 3 – to the eye. recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Switch on ignition to release steering column lock and to permit operation of After towing, unscrew the towing eye brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper. clockwise and refit the cover. Vehicles with the Open&Start system 3 Towing service must not be towed when the battery is discharged because the steering column Entrust your vehicle only to the towing lock cannot be released. Towing is only service of your choice and obtain an possible with the ignition switched on. Use estimate on towing costs before employing jump leads to start the engine if necessary. any towing service. In this way you avoid unnecessary costs and possible insurance problems during claim processing. Self-help 247

Picture no: 17233t.tif Picture no: 18017t.tif Picture no: 17234t.tif Towing another vehicle On some model variants 3: remove the Screw in the towing eye anticlockwise as far To open the cover concealing the towing cover concealing the towing eye at the rear as it will go until it stops in a horizontal eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle: right of the vehicle by disengaging the tabs position. disengage the cover at the bottom and pull at the bottom and pulling off the cover Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a it off downwards. from the top. tow rod 3 – to the eye. The towing eye is found in the stowage Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive 3 3 compartment for the jack and vehicle tractive force can damage the vehicle. located under the spare wheel or in the stowage compartment together with the After towing, unscrew the towing eye tyre repair kit 3 under the floor cover. clockwise and refit the cover. Jack and vehicle tools – see page 251. Model variants with cover 3: install by inserting the bottom lugs of the cover 3 in 3 Tyre repair kit – see page 256. the bumper, folding and then press the lugs at the top into place. 248 Self-help

Picture no: 17235t.tif Picture no: 17236t.tif Picture no: 17237t.tif Warning triangle ¨ 3 Estate First-aid kit (cushion) + 3 Hatchback, Astra TwinTop Insert the warning triangle in the retaining Hatchback Store warning triangle in rear luggage straps of the tailgate inner panelling. Secure the first-aid kit to the right luggage compartment wall: first fit warning triangle compartment wall using the retaining into recess on left and the insert in guide on strap. right. To remove the warning triangle, lift to the right and pull out to the right. For vehicles with cargo box 3: lift the warning triangle with the right half of the cargo box. Pull out the warning triangle to the right. Self-help 249

Picture no: 17238t.tif Picture no: 17985t.tif Picture no: 17239t.tif Estate Astra TwinTop Stowing in the luggage compartment Fasten the first-aid kit (cushion) to the left Store the first-aid kit (cushion) in the recess The spare wheel is located in the luggage luggage compartment wall with a behind the strap in the left luggage compartment below the floor cover and is retaining strap. compartment wall. fastened with a nut. On Estates, there is also a spacer over the retaining nut. 3 Spare wheel Stowing standard size tyres in the spare Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre wheel well repair kit instead of a spare wheel - The spare wheel well is not designed for all see page 256. sizes of commercially available tyres. If a larger wheel must be stowed in the spare wheel well after changing wheels, place the floor cover on the overlaying wheel. This must be observed when loading the vehicle, especially for the Astra TwinTop. 250 Self-help

General information Notes on temporary spare wheel 3 Depending on model variant, the spare z Using a temporary spare wheel may wheel may take the form of a temporary change the driving behaviour of the spare wheel 3. Refer to the notes on vehicle, particularly if using winter pages 233, 255 and 326. tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare as possible, balance wheel and fit to wheel may have a steel rim. vehicle. z If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel Fit only one temporary spare wheel. may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you z Do not drive faster than 50 mph use the spare wheel the vehicle’s handling (80 km/h). may be altered. Obtain a replacement for z Take curves slowly. the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and fitted to the z Do not use the temporary spare wheel Picture no: 17240t.tif vehicle. for a lengthy period. Estate z Replace temporary spare wheel with full Remove the adapters 3 and hooks 3 from The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre 3 and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted specification wheel without delay. the rails in the luggage compartment 1) walls. Raise the rear lashing eyes and lift on the vehicle : using the spare wheel may z Snow chains are not permitted on the the floor cover to a vertical position so that alter vehicle handling. Have the defective temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains are it is retained by the headliner. tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance necessary after a front wheel puncture, the wheel and have it mounted on the fit the temporary spare wheel to the rear When closing, guide the lashing eyes vehicle. and a rear wheel to the front. Check tyre through the slots in the floor cover. pressure and adjust if necessary – Vehicles with cargo box 3: removal – see page 327. see page 102. z Follow temporary spare wheel Astra TwinTop instructions on pages 233, 255 and 326. Accessing the spare wheel when the roof is open: engage luggage compartment cover on the rear window frame and activate the loading aid (see page 103). Raise the floor cover in the luggage compartment.

1) Country-specific version: the spare wheel is only to be used as a temporary spare wheel. Self-help 251

Notes on directional tyres 3 Directional tyres only provide maximum performance when they are mounted in the correct direction of rotation. If the tyres or spare wheel must be mounted opposing the specified direction of rotation (e.g. after changing a flat tyre), observe the following: z Vehicle handling may change. Have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and mounted on the vehicle. z Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). Picture no: 17241t.tif Picture no: 17242t.tif Jack £3 and vehicle tools 3 After use, stow away the jack and tools in z Be especially careful when driving in rain the compartment as shown in illustration. and snow. The jack and the vehicle tools have been specially developed for your vehicle and Astra TwinTop: the tools for emergency Further information on directional tyres – must only be used on that vehicle. Only use operation of the convertible hardtop are see page 226. jack for changing wheels. stowed in the glove compartment. Vehicles with spare wheel 3: the jack and vehicle tools are stowed in a compartment in the luggage compartment beneath the spare wheel. Remove the spare wheel - see page 249. Vehicles with tyre repair kit 3: the vehicle tools are stowed together with the tyre repair kit in a compartment beneath the floor cover in the luggage compartment. 252 Self-help

Changing wheels z Never change more than one wheel at z No people or animals may be in the There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a once. vehicle when it is jacked up. spare wheel – see page 256. z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle. To ensure your safety, make the following wheel to be changed by placing wedge z Do not start or run the engine while the preparations and observe the following blocks or equivalent in front and behind vehicle is on the jack. information when changing wheels: the wheel. z Fully tighten the wheel bolts after z 3 z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non- Use the jack only to change wheels. lowering the vehicle all the way. skid surface. z If the ground on which the vehicle is z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm handbrake, automatic transmission 3 – thick) should be placed under the jack 3. selector lever in P, manual transmission Using a thicker board could damage the or Easytronic 3 – engage 1st or reverse jack 3 and the vehicle. gear. z Correctly set up the warning triangle. Warning triangle – see page 248. z Take the spare wheel from the luggage compartment. z Before raising the vehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z On the Astra TwinTop, the roof must be closed before the vehicle is raised. z Slacken the wheel bolts one half turn before raising the vehicle, but do not totally unscrew the bolts. Self-help 253

Picture no: 17243t.tif Picture no: 17244t.tif Picture no: 17245t.tif 1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook Alloy wheels 3: disengage the wheel bolt 2. Slacken wheel bolts using wheel bolt included with the vehicle tools 3. caps with a screwdriver and remove. wrench 3, putting on the wheel bolt For vehicle tools – see page 251. Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth wrench as far as possible. For wheel trims with visible wheel bolts 3: between the screwdriver and ally wheel. the trim can remain on the wheel. Do not remove the retaining washers 3 on the wheel bolts. 254 Self-help

Picture no: 17246t.tif Picture no: 17247t.tif Picture no: 17248t.tif 3. The location of each jacking point 3 is 4. Before positioning the jack 3, set it to the Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and indicated by a mark on the bottom edge necessary height by rotating the eye by turn crank to raise vehicle. 3 of the vehicle. hand. Position the jack at the front or If this is not the case, carefully lower the rear so that the jack claw spans the vehicle immediately and reposition the vertical base and grips in the recess in jack. the vertical base. Make sure it is properly positioned. 5. Unscrew wheel bolts and put somewhere where the threads will not be soiled. The jack base must be on the ground directly below the jacking point in a If the wheel bolts have retaining manner that prevents it from slipping. washers 3, they must not be removed. Self-help 255

10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the 13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel wheel around the retaining clips. Valve bolts on the new wheel checked on the symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must vehicle using a torque wrench as soon point towards valve on wheel. as possible and, if necessary, corrected. Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt Tightening torque – see page 326. caps 3. 14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel Alloy wheels 3: align and refit wheel that was removed. bolt caps 3. 15. Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with 11. Stow replaced wheel, tools and warning a full specification wheel without delay. triangle in luggage compartment – 16. Initialise the Deflation Detection System see pages 248 to 251. (DDS) 3 or tyre pressure monitoring 3 12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly system – see pages 217, 220. Picture no: 17249t.tif fitted wheel. Adjust as necessary. 6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare wheel – see page 249. Notes on temporary spare wheel – see page 250. 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly, inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 256 Self-help

Tyre repair kit 3 Minor damage to the tyre tread or side wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be repaired using the tyre repair kit (does not apply to run-flat tyres). Do not remove the foreign body from the tyre. Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is on the rim cannot be repaired with the tyre repair kit. 9 Warning

Driving with inadequate tyre pressure or Picture no: 17250t.tif Picture no: 17251t.tif The tyre repair kit is in a compartment 3. Remove the electrical connection cable a flat tyre can lead to hidden tyre under the floor cover luggage and air hose from the stowage damage, which cannot be eliminated by compartment. compartments on the underside of using the tyre repair kit. Part the vehicle the compressor. and consult a workshop. We recommend 1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. from the compartment. Carefully remove the components from the pouch. Important information – see page 259. 2. Remove the compressor. In the event of a flat tyre: z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply handbrake, automatic transmission 3 – selector lever in P, manual transmission or Easytronic 3 – engage 1st or reverse gear. z Correctly set up the warning triangle. Warning triangle – see page 248. Self-help 257

Picture no: 17252t.tif Picture no: 17253t.tif Picture no: 17254t.tif 4. Screw the compressor air hose to the 7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve. 10. Set the rocker switch on the connection on the sealant bottle. 8. The switch on the compressor must be compressor to I. The tyre is filled with 5. Fit the sealant bottle in the retainer on set to §. sealant. the compressor. 9. Connect the compressor plug to the 11. While the sealant bottle drains (approx. Set the compressor near the tyre in such accessory socket or cigarette lighter 30 seconds) the pressure indicator on a way that the sealant bottle is upright. socket. Accessory socket – see page 106. the compressor briefly points to 6 bar. Pressure then sinks again. 6. Remove the valve cap from the defective tyre. 12. All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled with air. 13. The prescribed tyre pressure (see page 326) should be reached within 10 minutes. Switch off the compressor when the correct pressure is obtained. 258 Self-help

Drain excess tyre pressure with the button over the pressure indicator. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes – see "Important information" on page 259. 14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the filler hose to the free connection on the sealant bottle. This prevents sealant leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage compartment. 15. Wipe away any sealant spill with a cloth. Picture no: 17255t.tif 16. Dismantle the warning triangle and Picture no: 17256t.tif If the prescribed tyre pressure is not stow it in the luggage compartment – If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar reached within 10 minutes, detach the see page 248. (19 psi), adjust to the prescribed value. tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle one tyre Repeat the procedure until there is no 17. The enclosed sticker shows the revolution (approx. 2 metres) in or more pressure loss. maximum permitted speed at which the against the flow of traffic. Reconnect tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in If tyre pressure is below 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre repair kit and continue the the driver’s field of vision. the vehicle must not be driven. Consult filling procedure for 10 minutes. If the a workshop. We recommend your 18. Continue driving immediately to allow prescribed tyre pressure is still not Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. reached, the tyre is too badly the sealant to distribute evenly damaged. Park the vehicle and consult throughout the tyre. Stop after approx. 19. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage a workshop. We recommend your 6 miles (10 km) but no more than 10 compartment – see page 256. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. minutes, and check tyre pressure. Screw the compressor air hose directly onto the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T). Self-help 259

Important The sealant can only be stored for approx. 4 years. After this time, the sealing 9 Warning properties can no longer be guaranteed. Heed the expiration date on the sealant Do not drive faster than 50 mph bottle. (80 km/h). The sealant bottle can only be used once. Do not use the temporary spare wheel for Replace a used sealant bottle. a lengthy period. The compressor and sealant can be used Steerability and driving behaviour may from approx. -30 °C. be impaired. Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in accordance with applicable legislation. The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is severely affected, therefore have this tyre An adapter for filling air mattresses, inner replaced. tubes, etc. is located on the underside of the compressor. Remove by unscrewing the If the compressor makes abnormal noises compressor air hose and pulling out the or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least adapter. 30 minutes. The integrated safety valve opens at a pressure of 7 bar (102 psi). Protect the compressor from moisture and rain. 260 Self-help

Picture no: 17257t.tif Picture no: 17258t.tif Picture no: 17259t.tif Electrical system Before replacing a fuse, turn off the Different versions of fuses are used. respective switch and the ignition. Fuse, Fuse, 9 Warning A blown fuse (see illustrations to the right) colour rating can be recognised by its melted wire. Do Electronic ignition systems generate very not install a new fuse until the cause of the Light brown 5 A high voltages. Do not touch the ignition fault has been remedied. Dark brown 7.5 A system; high voltage can be fatal. There is a fuse extractor in the luggage Red 10 A Fuses compartment fusebox to facilitate Light blue 15 A The vehicle has two fuseboxes: one behind replacement of small fuses – see illustration Yellow 20 A a cover on the left side of the luggage above for an example. White 25 A compartment and one in the front left of Only fit fuses of the specified current the engine compartment. Light green 30 A rating. Each fuse has its current rating It is advisable to carry a complete set of written on it, in addition the ratings are fuses – available from any Vauxhall colour coded. Authorised Repairer. Store spare fuses in the luggage compartment fusebox – see illustration above. Opening the cover – see following pages. Self-help 261

Picture no: 17260t.tif Picture no: 17261t.tif Picture no: 18022t.tif Fuses and the most important 3-door Hatchback Fuse, Fuse, circuits they protect To open, fold the cover upwards. colour rating Fusebox in luggage compartment Astra TwinTop Light blue 20 A Depending on the equipment version, To open, pull the two knobs, remove the White 25 A there are two different fuseboxes for clips and fold the cover upwards. Pink (maxi-fuse) 30 A differing electrical circuits. z Version A – see Fig. 17949 T Dark green z Version B – see Fig. 17958 T (maxi-fuse) 40 A Astra TwinTop always has version B. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 260. The fusebox is located on the left side of the luggage compartment behind a cover. Do not store any objects behind the cover. 5-door Hatchback and Estate To open, use a coin to turn the two latches as illustrated and fold the cover downwards. 262 Self-help

Fusebox, version B No. Circuit Rating Some functions are protected by several fuses. 13 Parking distance sensors 5 A 14 Heating, 7.5 No. Circuit Rating air conditioning system 1 Electric 25 A 15 –– windows, front 16 Seat occupancy recognition, 5 A 2 –– Open&Start system 3 Instruments 7.5 A 17 Rain sensor, 5 A 4 Heating, 5 A air quality sensor, air conditioning system, tyre pressure monitoring Electronic Climate Control system, (ECC) 3 interior mirror Picture no: 17949t.tif 5 Airbags 7.5 A Fusebox, version A 18 Instruments, switches 5 A Some functions are protected by several 6 ––19 –– fuses. To replace a fuse, pull off its 7 ––20 CDC 10 A protective cap. 8 ––21 Heated exterior mirrors1) 7.5 A No. Circuit Rating 9 ––22 Sunroof 20 A 1 Luggage compartment 15 A 10 ––23 Electric 25 A socket 11 Heated rear window 25 A windows, rear 2 Rear socket 15 A 12 Tailgate wiper 15 A 3 Electric 30 A windows, front 4 Electric 30 A windows, rear 5 Heated exterior mirrors 7.5 A 6 Air conditioning system 10 A

1) Not in conjunction with Vauxhall alarm system 3. Self-help 263

No. Circuit Rating 38 Central locking system, 25 A clamp 30 39 Seat heater (left) 15 A 40 Seat heater (right) 15 A 41 –– 42 –– 43 –– 44 ––

Picture no: 17958t.tif Picture no: No. Circuit Rating No. Circuit Rating 24 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A 32 –– 25 ––33 Open&Start system 15 A 26 Electrically retractable 7.5 A 34 Sunroof, TwinTop 25 A exterior mirrors 35 Rear socket 15 A 27 Ultrasonic sensor, 5 A 36 Towing equipment 20 A Vauxhall alarm system 37 Courtesy light 5 A 28 –– 29 Cigarette lighter, 15 A front socket 30 Rear socket 15 A 31 –– 264 Self-help

Depending on the equipment version, Fuse layout, version A there are two different fuse layouts for the Some functions are protected by several engine compartment fusebox, handling fuses. different electrical circuits: No. Circuit Rating z If the luggage compartment fusebox is version A – see Fig. 17949 T on 1 ABS 20 A page 262 – the fuse layout in the engine 2 ABS 30 A compartment is version A - see next 3 Interior fan 30 A column. climate control system z If the luggage compartment fusebox 4 Interior fan, 30 A is version B – see Fig. 17958 T on heating, page 263 – the fuse layout in the air conditioning system engine compartment is version B – 1) see next page. 5 Radiator fan 1 30 A Picture no: 17263t.tif 40 A Fusebox in engine compartment Astra TwinTop always has version B. The fusebox is at the front left side of the engine compartment. Spare fuses, fuse extractor – see page 260. 9 Warning

Turn off engine before opening engine compartment fusebox; risk of injury – see page 291.

To open the cover, release the catch by inserting a screwdriver into the opening as far as it will go and swivelling it to the side. Open the cover upwards and remove.

1) Different ratings depending on engine and equipment level. Self-help 265

No. Circuit Rating 21 Engine electronics 20 A 22 Engine electronics 7.5 A 23 Headlight range adjustment 5 A 24 Fuel pump 15 A 25 Reversing lights 5 A 26 Engine electronics 10 A 27 Heating, 7.5 A air conditioning system, air quality sensor 28 –– Picture no: 17264t.tif Picture no: No. Circuit Rating No. Circuit Rating 29 Power steering 5 A 6 Radiator fan 21) 20 A 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A 30 Engine electronics 10 A 30 A 15 Windscreen wiper 30 A 31 Tailgate wiper 15 A 40 A 16 Horn, 5 A 32 Brake light switch 5 A 7 Central locking system 20 A ABS, 33 Headlight range 5 A 8 Windscreen wash system, 10 A brake light switch, adjustment, tailgate air conditioning system light switch, 9 Heated rear window, 30 A 17 Diesel filter 25 A clutch switch, heated exterior mirrors or instrument assembly, driver’s door module 10 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A air conditioning system 20 A 18 Starter 25 A 34 Control unit 7.5 A 11 Instruments 7.5 A steering column module 19 Transmission electronics 30 A 12 Mobile telephone, 7.5 A 35 Infotainment system 20 A digital radio, 20 Horn 15 A Twin Audio, 36 Cigarette lighter, 15 A display front socket 13 Courtesy light 5 A

1) Different ratings depending on engine and equipment level. 266 Self-help

Fuse layout, version B No. Circuit Rating No. Circuit Rating Some functions are protected by several fuses. 7 Windscreen wash system 10 A 16 Electronics control units, 5 A 8 Horn 15 A Open&Start system, No. Circuit Rating ABS, 9 Headlight wash system 25 A 1 ABS 20 A brake light switch, 10 –– 2 ABS 30 A TwinTop 11 –– 3 Interior fan 30 A 17 Diesel filter heating 25 A climate control system 12 ––18 Starter 25 A 4 Interior fan, 30 A 13 Front fog lights 15 A 19 Transmission electronics 30 A heating, 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A 20 Air conditioning system 10 A air conditioning system 15 Windscreen wiper 30 A 21 Engine electronics 20 A 5 Radiator fan 11) 30 A 22 Engine electronics 7.5 A 40 A 23 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A 6 Radiator fan 21) 20 A headlight range adjustment 30 A 40 A

1) Different ratings depending on engine and equipment level. Self-help 267

Picture no: 17264t.tif Picture no: No. Circuit Rating No. Circuit Rating 24 Fuel pump 15 A 31 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A 25 Transmission electronics 15 A headlight range adjustment 26 Engine electronics 10 A 32 Brake system, 5 A air conditioning system, 27 Power steering 5 A clutch switch 28 Transmission electronics 5 A 33 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 5 A 29 Transmission electronics 7.5 A headlight range adjustment, 30 Engine electronics 10 A light switch 34 Control unit, 7.5 A steering column module 35 Infotainment system 20 A 36 Mobile telephone, 7.5 A digital radio, Twin Audio, display 268 Self-help

Bulb replacement Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off. Only hold new bulb at base! Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass evaporate. Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadvertently stained bulbs may be cleaned with a clean non-fluffy cloth, using alcohol or white spirits. Replacement bulb must be in accordance with data on base of defective bulb. Do not Picture no: 17265t.tif Picture no: 17266t.tif exceed wattage given on bulb base. The bulbs of the front external lights are Halogen headlight system replaced through openings in the front Headlights with separate systems for main wheel arch: turn relevant wheels to gain beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2 access, release catch and remove cover. (outer bulbs). Headlight aiming We recommend that headlight aiming be carried out by your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have special equipment. When adjusting headlights, headlight range adjustment must be set to 0. Self-help 269

Picture no: 17267t.tif Picture no: 17268t.tif Picture no: 17269t.tif Dipped beam 3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from 1. Replace bulb through opening the front the reflector. wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain access, release catch and remove cover – see page 268. 2. Remove headlight protective cover. 270 Self-help

Picture no: 17270t.tif Picture no: 17271t.tif Picture no: 17272t.tif 5. Detach bulb from bulb holder. Main beam 5. Disengage spring clip from retainer by 6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder, 1. Open bonnet. pressing forward and then swing downward. without touching the glass. 2. Replace bulbs from engine 7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on compartment out. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. the bulb holder engage in the recesses To replace the bulb on the right-hand 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the in the reflector. side, remove the air hose from the air lugs in the recesses on the reflector 8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as filter. without touching the glass. it will go. To replace the bulb on the left-hand 9. Place headlight protective cover in side, remove the plug from the fusebox. position and close. 3. Remove headlight protective cover. 10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch 4. Detach plug connector from bulb. and engage. Self-help 271

8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector onto bulb. 9. Place headlight protective cover in position and close. After bulb replacement on the right- hand side, reattach air hose to air filter and engage. After bulb replacement on the left- hand side, reconnect the fusebox plug and engage.

Picture no: 17271t.tif Picture no: 17273t.tif Parking lights 4. Remove parking light socket from 1. Open bonnet. reflector. 2. Replace bulbs from engine compartment 6 out. To replace the bulb on the right-hand side, remove the air hose from the air filter. To replace the bulb on the left-hand side, remove the plug from the fusebox. 3. Remove main beam headlight protective cover. 272 Self-help

Picture no: 17274t.tif Picture no: 17275t.tif Picture no: 17276t.tif 5. Remove bulb from socket. Xenon headlight system 3, Main beam 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the Adaptive Forward Lighting 1. Replace bulb through opening the front glass. system 3 wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight Headlights with separate systems for access, release catch and remove protective cap in position and close. dipped beam 1 (inner bulbs) and main cover – see page 268. beam 2 (outer bulbs). After bulb replacement on the right- 2. Remove headlight protective cover. hand side, reattach air hose to air filter Dipped beam and engage. 9 Warning After bulb replacement on the left-hand side, reconnect the fusebox plug and The dipped beam operates at very high engage. voltage. Do not touch; high voltage can be fatal. Have bulbs changed by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Self-help 273

Picture no: 17277t.tif Picture no: 17278t.tif Picture no: 17270t.tif 3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from 5. Detach bulb from bulb holder. the reflector. 6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder, without touching the glass. 7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb holder engage in the recesses in the reflector. 8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it will go. 9. Place headlight protective cover in position and close. 10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and engage. 274 Self-help

Picture no: 17276t.tif Picture no: 17279t.tif Picture no: 17280t.tif Parking lights 4. Remove parking light socket from 5. Remove bulb from socket. 1. Open bonnet. reflector. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the 2. Replace bulb through opening the front glass. wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight access, release catch and remove protective cap in position and close. cover – see page 268. 8. Position cover on opening in wheel arch 3. Remove main beam headlight protective and engage. cover. Self-help 275

6. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate clockwise and engage in position. 7. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and engage. Front fog lights 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Picture no: 17281t.tif Picture no: 17282t.tif Front indicator lights 4. Push bulb into socket slightly, rotate left 1. Open bonnet. and remove. 2. Replace bulb through opening the front 5. Insert new bulb, without touching the wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain glass. access, release catch and remove cover – see page 268. 3. Rotate bulb holder to left and disengage. 276 Self-help

Picture no: 17283t.tif Picture no: 17284t.tif Picture no: 17285t.tif Tail lights 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear. Hatchback 5-door 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen 1. To replace bulbs on the right side, use a fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3 coin to open the lock as indicated in the and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt illustration and fold the cover down. wrench 3 – see vehicle tools on To replace bulbs on the left side, use a page 251. coin to turn both locks as illustrated on page 261 in Fig. 17261 T and fold the cover down. Self-help 277

6. Remove bulb from socket. 7. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing, ensuring that it properly engages. Insert three screws with washers and tighten as far as possible.

Picture no: 17286t.tif Picture no: 17287t.tif 5. Unscrew three screws using a screwdriver Bulbs in bulb holder: (vehicle tools – see page 251). Press 1 = Reversing light locking tabs on outside of bulb holder 2 = Turn signal inward and remove the bulb holder. 3 = Tail light / brake light 4 = Tail light 5 = Fog tail light 278 Self-help

11. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – switch on ignition, – operate brake, – switch on parking lights.

Picture no: 17288t.tif Picture no: 17289t.tif 9. Ensure that the bulb holder seal is 10. Insert the bulb housing in the body, positioned as illustrated. engaging the lug and the ball pin in the recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the plug connector. Close and engage the flap. Self-help 279

Picture no: 17290t.tif Picture no: 17284t.tif Picture no: 17285t.tif Hatchback 3-door 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear. 1. To replace bulbs, fold the cover down. 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3 and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt wrench 3 – see vehicle tools on page 251. 280 Self-help

6. Remove bulb from socket. 7. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing, ensuring that it properly engages.

Picture no: 17291t.tif Picture no: 17287t.tif 5. Remove the round seal from the Bulbs in bulb holder: fastening bolt. Press the locking tabs on 1 = Reversing light the outside of the bulb holder outward 2 = Turn signal and remove the bulb holder. 3 = Tail light / brake light 4 = Tail light 5 = Fog tail light Self-help 281

11. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – switch on ignition, – operate brake, – switch on parking lights.

Picture no: 17292t.tif Picture no: 17289t.tif 9. Ensure that the bulb holder seal is 10. Insert the bulb housing in the body, positioned as illustrated. Fit the round engaging the lug and the ball pin in the seal on the fastening bolt. recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the plug connector. Close and engage the flap. 282 Self-help

Picture no: 17293t.tif Picture no: 17294t.tif Picture no: 17295t.tif Estate 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Unscrew the three screws with a 1. Disengage cover by pressing retaining 3. Hold the outside of the bulb housing, screwdriver (vehicle tools – see lugs and remove. unscrew the three fastening nuts and page 251) and remove the bulb holder. remove the bulb housing rearwards. Self-help 283

6. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing and screw in place. Insert bulb housing into body and tighten fastening nuts by hand. Attach plug connector. Close and lock cover. 7. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – switch on ignition, – operate brake, – switch on parking lights.

Picture no: 17296t.tif Picture no: 17986t.tif Bulbs in bulb holder: Astra TwinTop 1 = Tail light / brake light 1. Unscrew retaining nuts. 2 = Turn signal 3 = Reversing light 6 4 = Fog tail light 5. Remove bulb from socket. 284 Self-help

Picture no: 17987t.tif Picture no: 17988t.tif Picture no: 17989t.tif 2. Remove bulb housing from outside. 4. Disengage sockets by turning and Bulbs in bulb holder: Disengage plug by pressing on flap remove. 1 = Tail light / brake light and remove from bulb holder. Press locking tabs on the long sides of 2 = Tail light 3. Detach seal from bulb holder. the bulb holder outwards; lift bulb holder 3 = Fog tail light at front end (arrow) and remove. 4 = Reversing light 5 = Turn signal Self-help 285

5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing by first inserting the lug in the front of the plug. Fold together bulb holder, ensuring that it engages properly. Insert sockets and engage by turning.

Picture no: 18018t.tif Picture no: 17297t.tif 8. Fit seal on bulb holder as illustrated. Number plate light Ensure that the seal is flat in the area 1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert of the screws. as illustrated above. Press to the side 9. Engage plug. Insert light housing in and release spring. body, ensuring proper positioning of the ball pins in the recesses. Tighten the retaining nuts. 10. Carry out the following steps to ensure proper function of the tail lights: – switch on ignition, – operate brake, – switch on parking lights. 286 Self-help

Picture no: 17298t.tif Picture no: 17299t.tif Picture no: 17300t.tif 2. Remove bulb housing downward, taking 4. Rotate bulb socket anticlockwise and Courtesy lights care not to pull on the cable. disengage. Front courtesy light, reading lights 3 3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb 5. Remove bulb from socket. To ensure that no power is supplied to the lights, close the doors before removing. socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 1. Disengage lens by hand at location illustrated above, press it downward 7. Insert socket in bulb housing and rotate slightly and remove at a downward clockwise to engage. angle. 8. Connect plug to bulb socket. 2. Remove bulb from socket. 9. Insert and engage bulb housing. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Mount lens and engage in position. Self-help 287

Rear courtesy lights 3, rear reading lights 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

Picture no: 17301t.tif Picture no: 17302t.tif Glove compartment lighting, 2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip luggage compartment lighting, and remove. 3 footwell lighting 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the To ensure that no power is supplied to the glass. lights, close the doors or hold the contact switch depressed before removing. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in position. 1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver. Instrument illumination, Information display illumination 3 Have the bulbs replaced by a workshop. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 288 If you have a problem

The majority of areas of concern can be They will review all the facts involved. Then If you have a problem quickly resolved in this way. if it is felt some further action can be taken, Should you wish to pursue the matter the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be further, the Principal of the Vauxhall advised accordingly. In any case, your Authorised Repairer should be made contact will be acknowledged confirming aware of your concern. It is advisable in Vauxhall Motors’ position in the matter. cases such as this to write to him to confirm If you are not satisfied with the outcome, your problem and the solutions that have you can if you wish, seek advice from an been offered. independent third party such as: You can be assured the Authorised Automobile Association (A.A.) Repairer’s Principal will only be too anxious Fanum House, to fully investigate your problems and BASINGSTOKE, correct any errors made. After all, he has a Hants., RG21 2EA In our experience the most common cause large investment in his business and is Royal Automobile Club (R.A.C.), of all complaints is the result of proud of his reputation and R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd., misunderstanding or lack of professionalism and fully realises that 89-91 Pall Mall, communication between the customer and satisfied customers are his key to success. LONDON, SW1Y S45 the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. In the unlikely event that you are still not The Customer Relations Department, We sincerely hope you will never have happy with the answer your Vauxhall Society of Motor Manufacturers and cause to complain about your vehicle. Authorised Repairer has given, or the Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.), However, if things do go wrong, the best action he proposes to correct the problem, Forbes House, Halkin Street, course of action for you to take is to you may contact the Customer Care LONDON, SW1X 7DS contact your Vauxhall Authorised Department1) where a team of Customer Repairer’s Service Reception Staff and Care Consultants will spare no effort to Customer Complaints Service, explain the difficulty you are having. We ensure your complete satisfaction. Scottish Motor Trade Association, (S.M.T.A.), are confident they will do their utmost to Vauxhall Motors Ltd. resolve the problem to your complete 3 Palmerston Place, Customer Care, EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ satisfaction. Griffin House, Sometimes, however, despite the best of Osborne Road, The National Conciliation Service, intentions of all concerned, LUTON, Retail Motor Industry Federation, misunderstandings can occur. If your Beds., LU1 3YT 9 North Street, problem has not been resolved to your Telephone: 01582 427200 RUGBY, CV21 2AB satisfaction, please make an appointment If you have a problem whilst abroad: to discuss the matter with the Manager of The Service Departments of Adam Opel AG the department concerned. 1) Calls may be monitored and recorded for and General Motors branches everywhere training purposes. will provide information and assistance: If you have a problem 289

Opel Austria Vertriebs GmbH ADAM OPEL AG General Motors Norge AS Groß-Enzersdorfer Str. 59 Bahnhofsplatz 1 Kjeller-Vest 6 1220 Vienna – Austria 65423 Rüsselsheim – Germany 2027 Kjeller – Norway Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04 00 43-1-2 88 77 0 00 49-61 42-7 70 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Opel Belgium N.V. General Motors Hellas S.A. Domaniewska 41 Prins Boudewijnlaan 30 56 Kifisias Avenue & Delfon str. 06-672 Warsaw – Poland 2550 Kontich – Belgium Amarousion Tel. 00 48-22-606 17 00 Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 11 151 25 Athens – Greece General Motors Portugal Opel C & S spol. s.r.o. Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01 Quinta da Fonte Na Pankráci 26 Opel Southeast Europe Ltd. Edificío Fernão Magalhães, Piso 2 140 00 Prague 4 – Czech Republic Szabadsag utca 117 2780-190 Paço d’Arcos – Portugal Tel. 00 420-2-61 21-88 21 2040 Budaörs – Hungary Tel. 00 351-21 440 75 00 General Motors Danmark Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 General Motors España S.L. Jaegersborg Alle 4 General Motors India Paseo de la Castellana, 91 2920 Charlottenlund – Denmark Sixth Floor, Tower A 28046 Madrid – Spain Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00 Global Business Park Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Mehrauli – Gurgaon Road Saab Opel Sverige AB Customer Care Gurgaon 122 022, Haryana – India Esbogatan 8 Griffin House, Osborne Road Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333 164 74 Kista – Sweden Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT – England Opel Ireland Ltd. Tel. 00 46-8-632 85 00 Tel. 00 44-15 82-42 72 00 Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road General Motors Suisse S.A. General Motors Finland Oy Sandyford, Dublin 18 – Ireland Stelzenstraße 4 Pajuniityntie 5 Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00 8152 Glattbrugg – Switzerland 00320 Helsinki – Finland General Motors Italia Srl Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 Tel. Helsinki 00 358-61 58 81 Piazzale dell’Industria 40 Opel Türkiye Ltd. Sti. General Motors France 00144 Rome – Italy Kemalpasa yolu üzeri 1 – 9, avenue du Marais Tel. 00 39-6-5 46 51 35861 Torbali/Izmir – Turkey Angle Quai de Bezons Opel Nederland B.V. Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 95101 Argenteuil Cedex – France Lage Mosten 49 – 63 In Albania, Bosnia-Herzegovina, Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 00 4822 NK Breda – Netherlands Bulgaria, Croatia, Macedonia, Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 88 00 Romania, Slovenia and Yugoslavia please contact the Opel Service Department in Budaörs – Hungary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 290 Maintenance, inspection system

The service interval display takes account Maintenance, of off-the-road periods during which the inspection system battery is disconnected. For vehicles with flexible oil change and service intervals, the length of these intervals is based on several parameters stemming from usage. For this reason, various engine-specific data is continually gathered and is used to calculate the remaining distance until the next service. This remaining distance can be displayed with the ignition off: briefly press the trip odometer reset button, the mileage Picture no: 17008t.tif reading shows. Press the button again for In order to guarantee economical and around 2 seconds, InSP and the remaining A note on safety ...... 291 safe vehicle operation and to maintain distance is shown. the value of your vehicle, it is of vital Checking and topping up fluids...... 291 If the remaining distance is less than Engine oil...... 292 importance that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals as 1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed Diesel fuel filter ...... 294 specified by Vauxhall. with a remaining distance of 600 miles Coolant...... 294 (1000 km) when the ignition is switched on Brake fluid ...... 296 In vehicles with a fixed oil change and and off. InSP is displayed for several Windscreen wiper ...... 297 service interval, InSP appears in the seconds if the remaining distance is less odometer display when the ignition is Windscreen and headlight than 600 miles (1000 km). Have the service switched on if the vehicle is due for service. wash systems 3...... 299 work that is due carried out within one Have service work performed within a Battery...... 300 week or 300 miles (500 km). Have this work week or 300 miles (500 km). We carried out by a repairer, in accordance Protecting electronic components ..... 300 recommend that you contact your with Vauxhall Motors' recommendations, Vehicle decommissioning...... 301 Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. using Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Vehicle recommissioning...... 301 Accessories, in order to avoid invalidation of warranty claims. Maintenance, inspection system 291

Further information on maintenance and the Service Plan can be found in the Service Booklet, which is in the glove compartment. Have maintenance work, as well as repairs to the bodywork and equipment, carried out by a professional. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with Vauxhall vehicles and in possession of the necessary special tools and the latest Service Instructions from Vauxhall. It is particularly advisable to use a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the warranty period to avoid invalidation of warranty claims. See the Service Booklet for Picture no: 17304t.tif Picture no: 17305t.tif further information. A note on safety Never carry out any repairs or adjustment Separate anti-corrosion service To avoid injury from moving parts and and maintenance work on the vehicle Have this carried out every 2 years, either cables conducting ignition voltage, only yourself. This especially applies to the within the scope of a Service or separately, carry out engine compartment engine, chassis and safety parts. You may see Service Booklet. We recommend that checks (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine unwittingly infringe the provisions of the you consult your Vauxhall Authorised oil level) when the ignition is switched off. law and, by not performing the work Repairer in order to avoid loss of warranty properly, endanger yourself and other claims for rust damage. 9 Warning road users.

The cooling fan is controlled by a Checking and topping up fluids thermoswitch and can therefore start To aid identification, the caps used when unexpectedly even if the ignition is topping up engine oil, coolant and wash switched off. Risk of injury. fluid as well as the oil dipstick are coloured yellow. Electronic ignition systems generate very high voltages. Do not touch the ignition system; high voltage can be fatal. 292 Maintenance, inspection system

Picture no: 17306t.tif Picture no: 17307t.tif Picture no: 17308t.tif Engine oil The engine oil level is checked Checking the engine oil level, 1) Information on engine oils is found in the automatically – see page 39. Before topping up engine oil Service Booklet. embarking on a long journey it is advisable The illustrations on this page indicate to check the engine oil level. checks on one petrol and two diesel Engine oil level and consumption engines. Every engine consumes engine oil for technical reasons. The engine oil The oil level must be checked with the consumption cannot be assessed until a vehicle on a level surface and with the fairly long distance has been driven, and engine (which must be at operating may be above the specified value when temperature) switched off. Wait at least the vehicle is first being driven (run-in 5 minutes before checking the level to period). Frequent driving at high revs allow the normal engine oil accumulation increases engine oil consumption. in the engine to drain into the oil pan. 9 Warning 9 Warning

Do not allow the engine oil level to drop It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain below the minimum level! the correct level of an appropriate quality oil in the engine.

1) Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation – see page 308. Maintenance, inspection system 293

Picture no: 17309t.tif Picture no: 17310t.tif Picture no: 17311t.tif To check the engine oil level, insert wiped Top up with the same brand of engine oil Oil change, oil filter change oil dipstick into handle as far as it will go. that was used during the previous oil Change the oil at the displayed service Top engine oil up if the level has dropped change, following the instructions in the intervals. into the range of the top-up mark MIN. Service Booklet. We recommend that you use genuine The engine oil level must not exceed the To close, position the cap and screw it Vauxhall oil filters. upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess into place. engine oil must be drained off or extracted. Capacities – see pages 336, 337. 9 Warning If the engine oil level is above the MAX mark there is a risk of damage to the We recommend that you entrust engine engine or the catalytic converter. oil and filter changes to a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who is familiar with Capacity between MIN and MAX marks – legal requirements regarding disposal of see pages 336, 337. used oil and oil filters and can thus help to protect both the environment and your health. 294 Maintenance, inspection system

Diesel fuel filter Coolant Check fuel filter for any water residue when During operation the system is pressurised. each engine oil change takes place. We The temperature may therefore rise briefly recommend that you consult your Vauxhall to over 100 °C. Authorised Repairer. The glycol-based coolant provides Illumination of A indicates water in the excellent corrosion protection for the fuel filter 3. heating and cooling systems as well as Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals anti-freeze protection down to –28 °C. It if the vehicle is subjected to extreme remains in the cooling system throughout operating conditions such as high humidity the year and need not be changed. (primarily in coastal areas), extremely high Use of certain anti-freezes can lead to or low outside temperatures and engine damage. We therefore recommend substantially varying daytime and night- that you use anti-freezes that have been Picture no: 17312t.tif time temperatures. approved by Vauxhall. Anti-freeze and corrosion protection Before the start of the cold weather season, 9 Warning have the coolant checked for correct concentration. We recommend that you Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it must consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. therefore be kept in the original container The amount of anti-freeze must provide and out of the reach of children. protection up to approx. –28 °C. If the anti- freeze concentration is too low, this reduces protection from freezing and corrosion. Top up anti-freeze if necessary. If coolant loss is topped up with water, have concentration checked and add anti- freeze if necessary. Maintenance, inspection system 295

Coolant temperature 9 Warning Control indicator W illuminates when coolant temperature is too high. Check Allow engine to cool down before coolant level immediately: removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler z cap carefully so that pressure can escape Coolant level low: slowly, otherwise there is a risk of Top up coolant. Pay attention to the scalding. instructions given under "Anti-freeze and corrosion protection" and "Coolant level". Have the cause of coolant loss Top up anti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is remedied. We recommend that you available, top up with clean tap water. consult your Vauxhall Authorised If tap water is unavailable, distilled water Repairer. can be used. z Coolant level OK: After topping up with drinking water or Picture no: 17313t.tif Have the cause of increased coolant distilled water, check the anti-freeze Coolant level temperature remedied. Consult a level and add anti-freeze if required. Hardly any losses occur since the cooling workshop. We recommend your Eliminate the cause of the coolant loss. system is sealed and it is thus rarely Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. necessary to top up the coolant. We recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. The coolant in the compensation tank should be slightly above the mark To close, position the cap and screw it into KALT / COLD with the cooling system cold. place. It rises when the engine is warm and falls again as it cools. If it drops below the marking in this case, it should be topped up to a level just above the marking. 296 Maintenance, inspection system

Use of certain brake fluids can lead to Brake fluid change damage or reduced braking effect. We Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs therefore recommend that you use only water. If the brakes become hot, such as high performance brake fluid approved by when driving on long downhill stretches, Vauxhall. vapour bubbles can occur in the water, When topping up, ensure maximum which can have an extremely adverse cleanliness as contamination of the brake effect on braking power (depending on the fluid can lead to function problems in the proportion of water). braking system. The fluid change intervals specified in the After correcting the brake fluid level, have Service Booklet must therefore be the cause of brake fluid loss remedied. We observed. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 9 Warning Picture no: 17314t.tif Brake fluid We recommend that you have brake fluid changed by a Vauxhall Authorised Brake fluid level Repairer, who will be familiar with the 9 Warning requirements of the law as regards disposal of brake fluid and can thus help to protect the environment and your Caution – brake fluid is poisonous and health. corrosive. Do not allow it to come into contact with eyes, skin, fabric or painted surfaces. Direct contact could cause injury and damage.

The fluid level in the reservoir must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor lower than the MIN mark. Maintenance, inspection system 297

Windscreen wiper If the wiper becomes frozen on to the glass, Clear vision is essential for safe driving. we recommend that it be released with the aid of Vauxhall De-icer Spray before Perform regular checks on the windscreen starting the vehicle, to prevent wiper motor wiper and headlight wash system 3 to damage. ensure they are operating correctly. We recommend wiper blade replacement at Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with least once a year. a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. If the windscreen is dirty, operate the windscreen wash system before switching Wiper blades whose lips have become on the windscreen wiper or setting the hardened, cracked or covered with silicone wiper to automatic operation with the rain must be replaced. This may be necessary sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear. as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or agents. Picture no: 17315t.tif set to automatic operation with the rain To ensure proper operation of the rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up, as this Switch off the windscreen wiper or sensor 3 the sensor area must be free could damage the wiper blades or the automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in from dust, dirt and ice, which is why wiper system. car washes – see pages 17, 18, 303. the windscreen wash system must be Windscreen wiper care – see page 304. operated at regular intervals and the sensor area de-iced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 can be identified by the sensor area near the top of the windscreen. 298 Maintenance, inspection system

Picture no: 17316t.tif Picture no: 17317t.tif Picture no: 17318t.tif Service setting for front windscreen wiper Wiper blades on the windscreen Wiper blade on the rear window 3 (e.g. for changing or cleaning the front Activate service setting - see previous Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade as wiper blades). column. Raise wiper arm, tilt wiper blade shown in illustration and remove. Within 4 seconds of switching off the at a 90° to the wiper arm and remove to engine but with the key in the starter the side. switch, press the windscreen wiper stalk downward. Release the stalk as soon as the wiper blades are vertical. Maintenance, inspection system 299

The windscreen wash system and headlight wash system will not freeze in winter:

Frost protection Mixture down to Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent : Water – 5 °C 1 : 3 – 10 °C 1 : 2 – 20 °C 1 : 1 – 30 °C 2 : 1

Picture no: 17319t.tif When closing the reservoir, press the lid Windscreen and headlight firmly over the beaded edge all the way wash systems 3 round. The fluid reservoir filler neck for the windscreen wash system and headlight wash system 3 is located at the front next to the left headlight. Capacities – see pages 336, 337. Fill only with clean water to prevent the nozzles from clogging. To improve cleaning efficiency, we recommend that you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. 300 Maintenance, inspection system

Laying up the vehicle for more than Protecting electronic components 4 weeks can lead to battery discharge, In order to prevent faults in electronic which may reduce the service life of the components in the electrical system, never battery. Disconnect battery from on-board connect or disconnect battery with engine power supply by detaching negative running or ignition switched on. Never start terminal (Vauxhall alarm system 3 is then engine with battery disconnected, e.g. disabled). when starting using jump leads. Ensure that ignition is switched off before To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not connecting battery. Then perform the make any modifications to the electrical following actions: system, e. g. connecting additional z Setting date and time in the information consumers or tampering with electronic display – see pages 48, 51, 56. control units (chip tuning). z 3 Picture no: 17320t.tif If necessary activate the windows 9 Warning Battery and sunroof 3 – see pages 143, 144. The battery is maintenance-free. In order to prevent the battery from Electronic ignition systems generate very discharging, some consumers such as the high voltages. Do not touch the ignition 9 Warning courtesy light automatically switch off system; high voltage can be fatal. after approx. 20 minutes. We recommend that you have battery Disconnecting / connecting the battery changes carried out by a Vauxhall from / to the electrical system Authorised Repairer. A Vauxhall Disconnect the battery from the vehicle Authorised Repairer knows the laws electrical system before charging: First concerning the disposal of used batteries detach the negative and then the positive and therefore protects the environment lead. Do not reverse the polarity of the and your health. battery, i.e. do not confuse the terminals for the positive and negative leads. When Retro-fitted electrical or electronic connecting, start with the positive lead and accessories can place an additional then connect the negative lead. load on the battery or even discharge the battery. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer regarding technical possibilities, such as fitting a more powerful battery. Maintenance, inspection system 301

Vehicle decommissioning Vehicle storage Vehicle recommissioning Observe national regulations. z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place. Observe national regulations. With manual transmission or If the vehicle is decommissioned for several Easytronic 3, engage 1st or reverse Perform the following work before months, the following work must be carried gear. With automatic transmission 3, recommissioning the vehicle: out in order to prevent damage. We selector lever in P. Use chocks or the z Connect battery – see page 300. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall like to prevent the vehicle from rolling. Authorised Repairer. z Check tyre pressure and correct if z Do not apply handbrake. necessary – see page 327. z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see page 303. z Disconnect battery by disengaging z Fill up windscreen wash system – negative terminal from vehicle electrical see page 299. z Check preservation in engine system – see page 300. compartment and on underbody and z Check engine oil level – see page 292. rectify where necessary. z Check the coolant level; top up with z Clean and wax the rubber seals of the anti-freeze if necessary – see page 295. bonnet, doors and roof. Intermediate z Fit the number plate if necessary. roof position for cleaning – see page 149. z Change engine oil – see page 293. z Check anti-freeze and corrosion protection – see page 294. z Check the coolant level, top up with anti-freeze if necessary – see page 295. z Empty windscreen wash system and headlight wash system. z Increase tyre pressure to value specified for full load – see page 327. 302 Vehicle care

Vehicle care Obtain advice from a Vauxhall Authorised Vehicle care aids 3 Repairer regarding cleaning materials that Vehicle wash: have been tested and recommended by z Wash brush, Vauxhall. z Car Shampoo, When caring for your vehicle, observe all z Car Sponges, national environmental regulations, z Insect Removal Sponge, particularly when washing it. z Wheel Cleaners, z Engine Cleaners, Regular, thorough care helps to improve z Glass Cleaners, the appearance of your vehicle and z Chamois Leather. maintain its value over the years. It is also a prerequisite for warranty claims for any Vehicle care: Vehicle care aids 3...... 302 paint or corrosion damage. The following z Paintwork Cleaner, Washing ...... 303 pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if z Paintwork Polish, z Waxing ...... 303 used properly, will help combat the Cream Polish, z Metallic Paintwork Wax, Polishing ...... 303 unavoidable, damaging effects of the environment. z Hard wax, Wheels ...... 303 z Vauxhall Touch-Up Paint, Paintwork damage...... 304 z Vauxhall Touch-Up / Aerosol Paint, Exterior lights ...... 304 z Wheel Preserver, Exterior lights ...... 304 z Insect Remover, Plastic and rubber parts ...... 304 z Window Cleaning Spray, Wheels and tyres ...... 304 z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent, Interior and upholstery...... 304 z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals, Seat belts...... 304 z Rust Preventative, z Windows...... 304 Alloy Wheel Cleaner, z Cleaner. Windscreen wiper blades...... 304 Locks...... 305 Engine compartment...... 305 Underbody ...... 305 Astra TwinTop ...... 305 Vehicle care 303

Washing Clean edges and folds on opened doors Polishing The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Polishing is necessary only if the paint environmental influences, e.g. continuous Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the has become dull or if solid deposits have changes in weather conditions, industrial vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use become attached to it. waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so separate leathers for paint and window Paintwork polish with silicone forms a wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows protective film, making waxing using automatic car washes, select a will impair vision. unnecessary. programme which includes waxing. Observe national regulations. Plastic body parts should not be treated Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, with wax and polish. pollen and the like should be cleaned off Waxing Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles immediately, as they contain aggressive Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular with a metallic-effect paint finish. constituents which can cause paint after it has been washed using shampoo damage. and at the latest when water no longer Wheels If using a car wash, comply with the forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise pertinent instructions of the car wash the paintwork will dry out. Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to clean the wheels. manufacturer. The windscreen wiper and Also wax edges and folds on opened doors rear window wiper must be switched off – and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Wheels are painted and can be treated see pages 17, 18. Remove antenna 3 and with the same agents as the body. For alloy roof rack 3. Stand on the door sill to reach wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel them more easily. Preserver. If you wash your vehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wings are also thoroughly rinsed out. 304 Vehicle care

Paintwork damage Plastic and rubber parts Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could Repair small areas of paint damage For additional cleaning of plastic and damage seat upholstery. Make sure such as stone impacts, scratches etc. rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any Velcro fasteners are closed. immediately using a Vauxhall touch-up other agent, and in particular do not use Seat belts applicator or Vauxhall spray and touch-up solvents or petrol. Always keep seat belts clean and dry. paint before rust can form. If rust has already formed, have the cause remedied. Wheels and tyres Clean only with lukewarm water or Cleaner. We recommend that you consult your Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Please also Windows pay attention to surfaces and edges Interior and upholstery When cleaning the heated rear window, beneath the vehicle where rust may have Clean the vehicle interior, including the make sure that the heating element on the formed unnoticed for some time. instrument panel facia, using interior inside of the window is not damaged. cleaner. Exterior lights Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather The instrument panel should only be in conjunction with Window Cleaner and Headlight and other protective light bezels Insect Remover. are made of plastic. If they require cleaned using a soft damp cloth. additional cleaning after the vehicle has Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent is been washed, clean them with Car cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use suitable for de-icing windows. Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or cleaner that is suitable for both fabrics and For mechanical removal of ice, use a caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, vinyl. commercially available sharp-edged ice and do not clean them dry. Do not use cleaning agents such as scraper. Press the scraper firmly against acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, pint the glass so that no dirt can get under it remover, nail varnish remover, washing and scratch the glass. powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable. Windscreen wiper blades Wax, such as that used in car washes, can cause streaks to form on the windscreen when the wiper is used. Vehicle care 305

Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with Protective wax that has been applied is Check the underbody after washing and a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen also removed during the engine wash. For have it waxed if necessary. Before the start Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary – this reason, have the engine, brake system of the cold weather season, check the PVC see page 297. components in the engine compartment, coating and protective wax coating. Have axle components with steering, body parts them restored to perfect condition if Locks and cavities thoroughly preserved with necessary. The locks are lubricated with a high-grade protective wax after the wash. We Caution - commercially available bitumen / lock cylinder grease at the factory. recommend that you consult your Vauxhall rubber materials can damage the PVC Vauxhall lock cylinder grease prevents the Authorised Repairer. coating. We recommend that you have locks from freezing up. Only use de-icing An engine wash can be performed in the underbody work carried out by a Vauxhall agent in emergencies, as they have a spring in order to remove dirt that has Authorised Repairer, who knows the degreasing effect and will impair the adhered to the engine compartment, prescribed materials and has experience in function of the locks. After using a de-icing which may also have a high salt content. the use thereof. agent, have the locks re-greased. We Check protective wax layer and make good The underbody should be washed recommend that you entrust this to your if necessary. Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. following the end of the cold weather Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. season to remove any dirt adhering to the Engine compartment underbody since this may also contain salt. Underbody Check protective wax coating and, if Areas of the engine compartment that are Your vehicle has a factory-applied necessary, have it restored to perfect painted in the same colour as the vehicle condition. must be looked after like any other painted PVC undercoating in the wheel arches surface. (including the longitudinal members) which provides permanent protection and needs Astra TwinTop It is advisable to wash the engine no special maintenance. The surfaces of Treat all seals, e.g. on the roof and compartment before and after winter and the vehicle underbody not covered by PVC windscreen frame, with silicone oil from preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and are provided with a durable protective wax time to time. Good contact between the brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets coating in critical areas. fine rubber lips and the sealing surfaces before washing the engine. On vehicles which are washed frequently in prevents leaks and reduces clamping When washing the engine with a steam-jet automatic car washes with underbody forces. cleaner, do not direct the steam jet at washing facility, the protective wax Intermediate roof position for cleaning – components of the Anti-lock Brake System coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving see page 149. (ABS), the air conditioning system, the additives. climate control system or the belt drive and Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. its components. 306 Technical data Technical data

Vehicle documents, Picture no: 17321t.tif Picture no: 17322t.tif identification plate...... 306 Vehicle documents, Information on identification plate: Vehicle identification data...... 307 identification plate 1 Manufacturer Coolant, brake fluid, oils ...... 307 The technical data is determined in 2 Type approval number Engine data...... 308 accordance with European Community 3 Vehicle Identification Number Performance...... 310 standards. We reserve the right to make 4 Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight modifications. Specifications in the vehicle 5 Permissible Gross Train Weight Fuel consumption, CO emissions ...... 313 2 documents always have priority over those 6 Maximum permissible front axle load Weights, payload and roof load ...... 318 given in this manual. 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load Tyres ...... 326 8 Vehicle-specific or country-specific data Electrical system ...... 335 The identification plate is affixed to the front right door frame. Capacities ...... 336 Dimensions...... 338 Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment...... 339 Technical data 307

Coolant, brake fluid, oils When topping up – coolant, – brake fluid, – manual transmission oil, – automatic transmission oil, – power steering oil, we recommend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who can advise you on the correct products to use. Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious damage to the vehicle. Engine oils Picture no: 17323t.tif Picture no: 17324t.tif The Vehicle Identification Number may be Information on engine oils is found in the Vehicle identification data Service Booklet. The Vehicle Identification Number is embossed on the instrument panel. stamped on the identification plate (see Engine code and engine number: stamped previous page) and in the vehicle floor on on left-hand side of engine on crankcase. the right-hand side under a cover between the driver’s door and seat. 308 Technical data

Engine data Sales designation 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 Turbo 2.0 Turbo Engine identifier code Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Number of cylinders44444 Bore dia. (mm) 73.4 79.0 80.5 86.0 86.0 Stroke (mm) 80.6 81.5 88.2 86.0 86.0 Piston displacement (cm3) 1364 1598 1796 1998 1998 Brake horse power (kW) 66 77 92 125 147 at rpm 5600 6000 5600 5200 5400 Torque (Nm) 125 150 170 250 262 at rpm 4000 3900 3800 1950 4200 Compression ratio 10.5 10.5 10.5 8.8 8.8 Octane requirement (RON)1) unleaded 95 2) 95 2) 95 2) 95 2) 95 2) or unleaded 98 2)) 98 2) 98 2) 98 2) 98 2) or unleaded 91 2)3) 91 2)3) 91 2) 91 2)4) 91 2)4) Max. permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6200 6400 6400 6400 6400 Oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

1) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. 2) Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). 3) Use of 91 RON fuel reduces power and torque. 4) If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used taking care to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with a caravan / trailer load or high payload. Technical data 309

Engine data Sales designation VXR 1.3 CDTI 1.7 CDTI 1.9 CDTI 1.9 CDTI Engine identifier code Z 20 LEH Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Number of cylinders44444 Bore dia. (mm) 86.0 69.6 79.0 82.0 82.0 Stroke (mm) 86.0 82.0 86.0 90.4 90.4 Piston displacement (cm3) 1998 1248 1686 1910 1910 Brake horse power (kW) 177 66 74 88 110 at rpm 5600 4000 4400 3250 4000 Torque (Nm) 320 200 240 280 320 at rpm 2400 to 5000 1750 to 2500 2300 1750 to 2750 2000 to 2750 Compression ratio 8.8 18.0 18.4 18.0 17.5 Octane requirement (RON)1) unleaded 95 2)3) – – – – or unleaded 98 2) – – – – or unleaded 91 2)4) – – – – Cetane requirement (CN)1) – 49 (D)5) 49 (D)5) 49 (D)5) 49 (D)5) Max. permissible engine speed, continuous operation (rpm) approx. 6400 5100 to 5300 5200 5200 5200 Oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6

1) Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228, Diesel DIN EN 590; D = Diesel; value printed in bold: recommended fuel. 2) Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number). 3) Use of 95 RON fuel reduces power and torque. Slight increase in fuel consumption. 4) If no unleaded Premium fuel is available, 91 RON can be used taking care to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with a caravan / trailer load or high payload. 5) A lower value is possible with winter diesel fuels. 310 Technical data

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), 5-door Hatchback Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 111/178 115/185 123/198 135/217 143/230 Easytronic 110/176 115/185 – – – Automatic transmission – – 117/188 – –

Engine1) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 107/172 112/180 121/194 129/208 Easytronic – 3) – – – Automatic transmission – – 117/188 –

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. 3) Value not available at time of printing. Technical data 311

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), 3-door Hatchback Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 112/180 116/187 124/200 137/220 145/234 Easytronic 111/178 116/187 – – – Automatic transmission – – 118/190 – –

Engine1) Z 20 LEH VXR Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 152/244 108/174 113/182 122/196 130/210 Easytronic – –3) – – – Automatic transmission – – – 118/190 –

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. 3) Value not available at time of printing. 312 Technical data

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), Estate Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 111/178 115/185 123/198 135/217 143/230 Easytronic – 115/185 – – – Automatic transmission – – 115/188 – –

Engine1) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 107/172 112/180 120/193 129/207 Easytronic – – – – Automatic transmission – – 116/187 –

Performance (approx. mph / km/h), TwinTop Engine Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 19 DTH Maximum speed2) Manual transmission 116/186 –3) 139/224 147/237 132/213 Easytronic – – – – – Automatic transmission – – – – –

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 2) The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified maximum speed of the vehicle. 3) Value not available at time of printing. Technical data 313

Fuel consumption, The directive is oriented to actual driving The figures given must not be taken as a CO emissions practices: Urban driving is rated at guarantee for the actual fuel consumption 2 1 approx. /3 and extra-urban driving with of a particular vehicle. Directive 80/1268/EEC (last changed 2 by 1999/100/EC) has applied for the approx. /3 (urban and extra-urban All values are based on the EU base measurement of fuel consumption consumption). Cold starts and acceleration model with standard equipment. phases are also taken into consideration. since 1996. The calculation of fuel consumption as The specification of CO2 emission is also a specified by directive 1999/100/EC takes constituent of the directive. account of the vehicle’s kerbweight, ascertained in accordance with these regulations. Optional extras may result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO2 emission levels than those quoted. To convert 1/100 km into mpg, divide 282 by number of litres/100 km. Saving fuel, protecting the environment – see page 198. 314 Technical data

1) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 5-door (tyre width up to 205 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8.2/ 7.7/– 8.6/ 8.5/– 10.4/–/11.4 –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 5.2/ 4.9/– 5.4/ 5.3/– 6.1/–/ 6.3 –/–/– –/–/– total 6.3/ 5.9/– 6.6/ 6.5/– 7.7/–/ 8.2 –/–/– –/–/– CO2 151/142/– 158/156/– 185/–/197 –/–/– –/–/– Engine2) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 6.2/–3)/– 6.4/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 4.0/– /– 4.2/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total 4.8/– /– 5.0/–/– –/–/– –/–/– CO2 130/– /– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/–

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 5-door (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8.4/ 7.9/– 8.8/ 8.7/– 10.6/–/11.6 12.8/–/– 13.1/–/– extra-urban 5.4/ 5.1/– 5.6/ 5.5/– 6.3/–/ 6.5 6.8/–/– 7.1/–/– total 6.5/ 6.1/– 6.8/ 6.7/– 7.9/–/ 8.4 9.0/–/– 9.3/–/– CO2 156/146/– 163/161/– 190/–/202 216/–/– 223/–/– Engine2) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban –/–3)/– 6.5/–/– 7.7/–/ 9.8 7.4/–/– extra-urban –/– /– 4.3/–/– 5.0/–/ 5.5 4.9/–/– total –/– /– 5.1/–/– 6.0/–/ 7.1 5.8/–/– CO2 –/– /– 138/–/– 162/–/192 157/–/–

1) For Z 17 DTH engine – tyre width up to 195 mm. 2) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 3) Values not available at time of printing. Technical data 315

1) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 3-door (tyre width up to 205 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8.2/ 7.7/– 8.6/ 8.5/– 10.4/–/11.3 –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 5.2/ 4.9/– 5.4/ 5.3/– 6.1/–/ 6.2 –/–/– –/–/– total 6.3/ 5.9/– 6.6/ 6.5/– 7.7/–/ 8.1 –/–/– –/–/– CO2 151/142/– 158/156/– 185/–/194 –/–/– –/–/– Engine2) Z 20 LEH VXR Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban –/–/– 6.2/–3)/– 6.4/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban –/–/– 4.0/– /– 4.2/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total –/–/– 4.8/– /– 5.0/–/– –/–/– –/–/– CO2 –/–/– 130/– /– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/–

4) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatchback 3-door (tyre width up to 225 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8.4/ 7.9/– 8.8/ 8.7/– 10.6/–/11.5 12.8/–/– 13.1/–/– extra-urban 5.4/ 5.1/– 5.6/ 5.5/– 6.3/–/ 6.4 6.8/–/– 7.1/–/– total 6.5/ 6.1/– 6.8/ 6.7/– 7.9/–/ 8.3 9.0/–/– 9.3/–/– CO2 156/146/– 163/161/– 190/–/199 216/–/– 223/–/– Engine2) Z 20 LEH VXR Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 13.0/–/– –/–/– 6.5/–/– 7.7/–/ 9.7 7.4/–/– extra-urban 7.0/–/– –/–/– 4.3/–/– 5.0/–/ 5.4 4.9/–/– total 9.2/–/– –/–/– 5.1/–/– 6.0/–/ 7.0 5.8/–/– CO2 221/–/– –/–/– 138/–/– 162/–/189 157/–/–

1) For Z 17 DTH engine – tyre width up to 195 mm. 2) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 3) Values not available at time of printing. 4) For Z 20 LEH engine – tyre width up to 235 mm. 316 Technical data

1) Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 205 mm ) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8.2/–/– 8.7/ 8.6/– 10.5/–/11.4 –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 5.2/–/– 5.5/ 5.4/– 6.2/–/ 6.3 –/–/– –/–/– total 6.3/–/– 6.7/ 6.6/– 7.8/–/ 8.2 –/–/– –/–/– CO2 151/–/– 161/158/– 187/–/197 –/–/– –/–/– Engine2) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 6.2/–/– 6.4/–/– –/–/– –/–/– extra-urban 4.0/–/– 4.2/–/– –/–/– –/–/– total 4.8/–/– 5.0/–/– –/–/– –/–/– CO2 130/–/– 135/–/– –/–/– –/–/–

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 8.4/–/– 8.9/ 8.8/– 10.7/–/11.6 12.9/–/– 13.2/–/– extra-urban 5.4/–/– 5.7/ 5.6/– 6.4/–/ 6.5 6.9/–/– 7.2/–/– total 6.5/–/– 6.9/ 6.8/– 8.0/–/ 8.4 9.1/–/– 9.4/–/– CO2 156/–/– 166/163/– 192/–/202 218/–/– 226/–/– Engine2) Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban –/–/– 6.5/–/– 7.8/–/ 9.8 7.5/–/– extra-urban –/–/– 4.3/–/– 5.1/–/ 5.5 5.0/–/– total –/–/– 5.1/–/– 6.1/–/ 7.1 5.9/–/– CO2 –/–/– 138/–/– 165/–/192 159/–/–

1) For Z 17 DTH engine - tyre width up to 195 mm. 2) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. Technical data 317

Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), TwinTop (tyre width up to 225 mm) Engine1) Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 19 DTH Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic transmission urban 9.1/–/– –2) 13.0/–/– 13.3/–/– 7.7/–/– extra-urban 5.8/–/– –2) 7.0/–/– 7.3/–/– 5.2/–/– total 7.0/–/– –2) 9.2/–/– 9.5/–/– 6.1/–/– 2) CO2 168/–/– – 221/–/– 228/–/– 165/–/–

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 2) Value not available at time of printing. 318 Technical data

Weights, payload and roof load The combined total of front and rear Roof load The payload is the difference between axle loads must not exceed the permissible The permissible roof load is 75 kg and the permitted Gross Vehicle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight. For example, if 100 kg for caravan with roof railing. (see identification plate on page 306) and the front axle is bearing its maximum The roof load is the combined weight of the the EC kerbweight. permissible load, the rear axle can only roof rack and the load. bear a load that is equal to the Gross Roof loads are not permitted on the Astra To calculate the kerbweight, enter the data Vehicle Weight minus the front axle load. for your vehicle below: TwinTop. z Kerbweight from With a trailer coupled and the towing Driving hints – see page 196. Table 1, vehicle fully loaded (including all Roof racks, caravan and trailer towing – page 319 + ...... kg occupants) the permissible rear axle see page 234. load (see identification plate or vehicle z Additional weight of documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg equipment versions from and permissible Gross Vehicle Weight by Table 2, page 323 + ...... kg 45 kg for the Hatchback. For the Estate, z Weight of heavy the permissible rear axle load may be accessories from exceeded by 60 kg and the permissible Table 3, Gross Vehicle Weight by 30 kg. If the page 325 + ...... kg permissible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) The total = ...... kg applies. If national regulations specify a is the EC kerbweight. lower maximum speed for vehicles towing Optional equipment and accessories a trailer, this must be observed. increase the kerbweight, which means that See the identification plate or vehicle the payload will also change slightly. documents for permissible axle loads. Note the weights given in the vehicle documents. Technical data 319

Weight (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), Hatchback 5-door Model Engine2) Manual Easytronic Automatic transmission transmission Astra Z 14 XEP 1230 1230 – Z 16 XEP 1265 1265 – Z 18 XE 1278 – 1310 Z 13 DTH 1330 – – Z 17 DTH 1365 – – Z 19 DT 1395 – 1425 Z 19 DTH 1393 – – Astra Z 14 XEP 1250 1250 – with air conditioning Z 16 XEP 1285 1285 – system Z 18 XE 1298 – 1330 or Electronic Climate Z 20 LEL 1385 – – Control (ECC) Z 20 LER 1385 – – Z 13 DTH 1345 – – Z 17 DTH 1380 – – Z 19 DT 1410 – 1440 Z 19 DTH 1408 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 320 Technical data

Weight (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), Hatchback 3-door Model Engine2) Manual Easytronic Automatic transmission transmission Astra Z 14 XEP 1210 – – Z 16 XEP 1245 1245 – Z 18 XE 1265 – 1297 Z 13 DTH 1310 – – Z 17 DTH 1345 – – Z 19 DT 1370 – 1393 Z 19 DTH 1390 – – Astra Z 14 XEP 1230 – – with air conditioning Z 16 XEP 1265 1265 – system Z 18 XE 1285 – 1317 or Electronic Climate Z 20 LEL 1365 – – Control (ECC) Z 20 LER 1365 – – Z 20 LEH VXR 1393 – – Z 13 DTH 1325 – – Z 17 DTH 1360 – – Z 19 DT 1385 – 1408 Z 19 DTH 1405 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. Technical data 321

Weights (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), Estate Model Engine2) Manual Easytronic Automatic transmission transmission Astra Z 14 XEP 1280 – – Z 16 XEP 1315 1315 – Z 18 XE 1325 – 1350 Z 13 DTH 1380 – – Z 17 DTH 1393 – – Z 19 DT 1435 – 1465 Z 19 DTH 1450 – – Astra Z 14 XEP 1300 – – with air conditioning Z 16 XEP 1335 1335 – system Z 18 XE 1345 – 1370 or Electronic Climate Z 20 LEL 1425 – – Control (ECC) Z 20 LER 1425 – – Z 13 DTH 1395 – – Z 17 DTH 1408 – – Z 19 DT 1450 – 1480 Z 19 DTH 1465 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 322 Technical data

Weights (kg), Table 1, Kerbweight1), TwinTop Model Engine2) Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission Astra Z 16 XEP 1495 – – Z 18 XE 1500 – – Z 19 DTH 1613 – – Astra Z 16 XEP 1515 – – with air conditioning Z 18 XE 1520 – – system Z 20 LEL 1605 – – or Electronic Climate Z 20 LER 1605 – – Control (ECC) Z 19 DTH 1628 – –

1) According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90 % full). 2) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. Technical data 323

Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Hatchback Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Life, Club 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 Design 12 12 12 12 12 SXi, SRi 24.5 24.5 24.5 12.6 12.6 Elite 22.8 22.8 22.8 9.3 9.3

Engine1) Z 20 LEH VXR Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Life, Club – 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 Design–12121212 SXi, SRi – 24.5 24.5 24.5 12.6 Elite – 22.8 22.8 22.8 9.3

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 324 Technical data

Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions Estate Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Life, Club 7.4 7.4 7.4 3 Design 13 13 13 9 SXi, SRi9997.3 Elite9995 Engine1) Z 20 LER Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Life, Club 3 7.4 3 3 Design 9 13 9 9 SXi, SRi 7.3 9 7.3 7.3 Elite5955

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. Technical data 325

Weights (kg), Table 2, Additional weight of equipment versions TwinTop Engine1) Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Z 19 DTH Life, Club –2) –2) –2) –2) –2) Design –2) –2) –2) –2) –2)

Weights (kg), Table 3, Heavy accessories

Accessories Sunroof Towing equipment Split rear seat bench Weight 25 (Hatchback 5-door, Estate) 22 (Hatchback 5-door, Estate) 10 (Hatchback 5-door) 23 (Hatchback 3-door) 20 (Hatchback 3-door) 20 (Estate) 9 (Hatchback 3-door)

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 2) Value not available at time of printing. 326 Technical data

Tyres Tyre chains 3 The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted Restrictions Restrictions 1) Not all tyres available on the market Tyre chains may be used on the front on the vehicle : Using the spare wheel may currently meet the structural requirements. wheels only. alter vehicle handling. Have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance We recommend that you consult a We recommend the use of Vauxhall-tested Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning the wheel and have it mounted on the fine-mesh tyre chains that add no more vehicle. suitable tyre makes. than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the These tyres have undergone special tests inboard sides (including chain lock). Tyre pressure in bar / psi2) to establish their reliability, safety and Tyre chains are not permitted on The specified tyre pressures are valid for specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. temporary spare wheel 115/70 R 16 or cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure Despite continuous market monitoring, we on tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17, resulting from extensive driving must not are unable to assess these attributes for 225/40 R 18 or 235/35 R 19. Tyre chains are be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on other tyres, even if they have been granted permitted on tyres of size 225/45 R 17 for the following pages apply to both summer approval by the relevant authorities or in the Astra TwinTop. and winter tyres. some other form. Further information – see page 232. Always inflate the spare wheel to the tyre Further information – see page 226. pressure for full load - see tables on Wheels following pages. Winter tyres 3 Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. Tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17, Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure - 225/40 R 18 or 235/35 R 19 are not to Depending on the model variant, the spare see tables on next page. be used as winter tyres. Tyres of size wheel may take the form of a temporary In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring 225/45 R 17 may be used as winter tyres spare wheel: vehicle driveability may be system 3 there is an adapter in the valve on the Astra TwinTop. altered by use of the spare wheel. Obtain a cap key. Screw adapter to valve before replacement for the faulty tyre as soon If winter tyres are in use, the spare wheel attaching tyre pressure gauge – as possible, and have the wheel balanced see page 228. may still be fitted with a summer tyre. and fitted to the vehicle. Use of the spare wheel may alter vehicle Further information – see pages 226 handling. Obtain a replacement for the to 233. faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the wheel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. Further information – see page 232.

1) Country-specific version: The spare wheel is only to be used as a temporary spare wheel. 2) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. Technical data 327

(ctd.) Hatchback Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure ECO2) Tyre pressure Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) load of up to loaded up to for full load 3persons 3people Engine3) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 14 XEP, 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 Z 16 XEP, 195/60 R 15, Z 18 XE 215/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18 195/65 R 15, 1.9/28 1.9/28 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.0/29 2.5/36 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 Z 20 LEL 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. 328 Technical data

(ctd.) Hatchback Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up ECO2) full load to 3 persons loaded up to 3people Engine3) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2.7/39 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 Z 20 LEH 205/50 R 17, 2.4/35 2.4/35 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 (VXR) 225/40 R 18, 235/35 R 19 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. Technical data 329

(ctd.) Hatchback Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up ECO2) full load to 3 persons loaded up to 3people Engine3) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 13 DTH 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. Notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. 330 Technical data

(ctd.) Hatchback Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up ECO2) loaded full load to 3 persons up to 3 people Engine3) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2.7/39 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. Notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. Technical data 331

(ctd.) Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up ECO2) loaded full load to 3 persons up to 3 people Engine3) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 14 XEP, 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38 Z 16 XEP, 205/55 R 16, Z 18 XE 225/45 R 17 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15, 215/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18 Z 20 LEL 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 332 Technical data

(ctd.) Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up to ECO2) loaded full load 3persons up to 3 people Engine3) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 13 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.5/36 2.9/42 195/60 R 15 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. Technical data 333

(ctd.) Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up ECO2) loaded full load to 3 persons up to 3 people Engine3) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/40 R 18 Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42 Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17 215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 – – 2.8/41 3.1/45 225/40 R 18 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. 334 Technical data

(ctd.) TwinTop Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up ECO2) loaded full load to 3 persons up to 3 people Engine3) Tyres – Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear Z 16 XEP, 205/55 R 16 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.2/32 2.6/38 Z 18 XE 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41 Z 20 LEL 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 Z 20 LER 205/55 R 16 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2.7/39 3.1/45 Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 – – 2.4/35 2.8/41 225/45 R 17 225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2.6/38 3.0/44 all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4.2/61 4.2/61 (temporary spare)4)

2) To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres. 3) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 4) 1) 1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel – see page 250. Technical data 335

Electrical system

Battery, Voltage 12 Volt Amp hours 36 Ah / 44 Ah 3 / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 Battery for remote control of central locking system and electronic key of Open&Start system CR 20 32 336 Technical data

Capacities (approx. litre) Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XEP Z 18 XE Z 20 LEL Z 20 LER Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52 52 52 Engine oil with filter change 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.25 4.25 between MIN and MAX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash system 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 with headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. Technical data 337

Capacities (approx. litre) Engine1) Z 20 LEH VXR Z 13 DTH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52 52 52 Engine oil with filter change 5.0 3.2 5.0 4.3 4.3 between MIN and MAX on dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wash system 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 with headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

1) Sales designation – see pages 308, 309. 338 Technical data

Dimensions (approx. mm) Hatchback 5-door Hatchback 3-door Estate TwinTop Overall length 4249 4290 4515 4476 Width 1753 1753 1753 1759 Width with two exterior mirrors 2033 2033 2033 2039 Overall height 1460 1435 1500 1411 Wheelbase 2614 2614 2703 2614 Turning circle diameter1) 11.20 11.20 11.50 11.20

1) In metres. Technical data 339

Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar, Hatchback1) All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 342.9 B 83 C 513.4 D 488.6 E 211.4 F 94.3 G 160

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.

1) Do not mount towing equipment to vehicles with Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation – see page 308. 340 Technical data

Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar, Estate All dimensions refer to factory-fitted towing equipment. Dimension mm A 84.0 B 570.0 C 515.0 D 93.5 E 173.0 F 307.6 G 158.0 H 292.6

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. Technical data 341

Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment with detachable coupling ball bar, Astra TwinTop All measurements refer to Vauxhall- approved towing equipment. Dimension mm A 68.8 B 570.0 C 515.0 D 485.0 E 93.5 F 288.0 G 245.0

9 Warning

Only use towing equipment approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retro-fitting of towing equipment to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. 342 Index

Automatic transmission.....20, 21, 182, 188 Index A Automatic mode ...... 183, 189 ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)...... 224 Control indicator...... 184, 191 Accessories...... 128, 133, 248 Driving programme...... 184, 191 Accessory socket ...... 106 Fault ...... 186, 194 Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)...... 137 Interruption of power supply..... 187, 195 Bulb replacement ...... 272 Kickdown...... 185, 192 Driving abroad...... 140 Manual mode ...... 190 Air conditioning system ...... 153, 160 Selector lever...... 20, 21, 183, 189, 190 Air intake...... 173 Winter programme...... 185, 192 Air quality sensor...... 168 Automatic wiping...... 17 Air recirculation system...... 160, 164, 172 Air vents ...... 155 Airbags...... 116 Alarm system ...... 83 Alternator...... 39 Antenna ...... 64, 303 Anti-freeze protection...... 294, 299 Anti-knock quality of fuel ...... 200 Octane number...... 308, 309 Anti-theft locking system...... 76 Towing equipment ...... 237 Anti-theft protection ...... 24 Aquaplaning...... 230 Armrest...... 89, 90, 108 Ashtray...... 106, 140 Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror... 132 Automatic air recirculation mode .168, 172 Index 343

Control indicators...... 10, 37 B C ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)...... 225 Battery...... 197, 300, 335 Capacities ...... 336, 337 Airbag ...... 121, 130 Interruption of Car Pass ...... 2 Adaptive Forward Lighting ...... 42, 137 power supply...... 143, 180, 187, 195 Caravan / trailer towing...... 196, 234 Belt tensioners ...... 112 Battery discharge protection...... 140 Cargo box ...... 102 Brake system...... 224 Before starting-off ...... 22 Catalytic converter...... 203, 207, 243 Cruise control...... 212 Belt tensioners...... 111 Central locking system...... 76 DDS...... 217 Bleeding, diesel fuel system...... 243 Changing the battery Deflation detection system...... 217 Board information display...... 46 Radio frequency Engine electronics...... 206 Bonnet ...... 86 remote control ...... 69, 75, 335 ESP (Electronic Stability Programme) 208 Boot, see Luggage compartment .....81, 91 Changing tyre / wheel type ...... 226 Exhaust...... 205 Brake assist ...... 222 Changing wheels ...... 252 IDS+...... 210, 211 Brake light ...... 222 Chassis number, Immobiliser...... 67 Brake system...... 38 see Vehicle Identification Number...... 307 Parking distance sensors ...... 215 Brakes...... 222 Check control...... 30, 62 Transmission ...... 184, 191 ABS...... 224 Child restraint system...... 128, 133 Tyre pressure monitoring system ...... 220 Brake assist ...... 222 Child safety locks...... 86, 142 Coolant ...... 294 Brake fluid ...... 296 Cigarette lighter ...... 105, 140 Coolant level...... 295 Brake lights...... 276, 282 Climate control ...... 153 Coolant temperature ...... 39 Brake servo unit ...... 196 Climate control system ...... 154, 167 Cooled glove compartment ...... 155 Footbrake...... 222 Clock...... 44 Cooling...... 161, 166 Handbrake ...... 223 Clutch operation...... 197 Correcting time...... 50, 56 Bulb replacement ...... 266, 268 CO2 emissions ...... 313 Coupling socket load ...... 240 Bulbs ...... 133, 266, 268 Code numbers ...... 2 Courtesy light ...... 139 Cold start ...... 197 Courtesy lights Colour information display...... 46 Bulb replacement ...... 286 Continuous Damping Control...... 39, 210 Cruise control...... 212 Contrast...... 57 Curtain airbags ...... 120 Curve lighting (AFL) ...... 33, 137 344 Index

D E F Data...... 66, 306 Easy Load ...... 103 Fan ...... 157, 291, 292 Date ...... 48, 51 Easytronic...... 20, 174 Filling station Daytime running lights...... 134 Driving programmes ...... 176 Capacities ...... 336, 337 Decommissioning ...... 301 Fault...... 180 Engine oil level...... 292 Deflation Detection System ...... 32, 217 Interruption of power supply ...... 180 Fuel ...... 200, 308, 309 Demisting and defrosting Kickdown...... 178 Ignition key ...... 2 Windows ...... 159 Selector lever...... 20 Opening the bonnet...... 86 With climate control system...... 170 Starting-off...... 175 Tyre pressure ...... 199, 326 With air conditioning system .....162, 166 Winter programme ...... 177 Vehicle data...... 307 Diesel fuel filter ...... 294 Economical driving...... 196, 198 Windscreen wash system...... 299 Diesel fuel system ...... 243, 294 Electric windows ...... 141 First-aid kit (cushion) ...... 133, 248 Diesel particle filter...... 42, 156, 197 Electrical system ...... 260, 300, 335 Flat tyre...... 256 Dipped beam...... 15, 134 Electro-hydraulic FlexOrganizer ...... 101 Bulb replacement...... 269, 272 power-assisted steering ...... 196 Front fog lights ...... 135 Display...... 43, 46 Electro-hydraulic Bulb replacement ...... 275 Display mode ...... 58 power-assisted steering Fog tail light...... 135 Door handle lighting ...... 140 fluid...... 307 Bulb replacement ...... 276, 282 Door locks...... 66, 305 Electronic components...... 300 Folding roof, see TwinTop...... 146 Doors ...... 38 Electronic immobiliser ...... 67 Footbrake ...... 222 Door-to-door lighting function ...... 138 Electronic Stability Programme...... 208 Front passenger’s airbag ...... 116 Driving abroad...... 200, 289 Engine code ...... 307, 308, 309 Fuel...... 200, 201, 308, 309 Headlights...... 140 Engine control indicator...... 206 Fuel consumption...... 198, 200, 313 Driving hints ...... 196 Engine speed ...... 197 Fuel filler cap ...... 201 Engine wash...... 305 Fuel filter ...... 294 Entry lighting...... 140 Fuel gauge...... 45 Environmental protection ...... 293, 302 Fuel system, diesel ...... 243 Exhaust control indicator...... 205 Fuses ...... 260 Exhaust gases...... 206 Exhaust system...... 206 Exterior mirrors ...... 6, 131, 156 Index 345

G H I Gears ...... 20 Halogen headlight system ...... 268 Identification plate...... 306 Generator, see Alternator ...... 39 Bulb replacement ...... 268 IDS+ (Interactive Driving System).. 208, 210 Genuine Vauxhall Parts Driving abroad...... 140 If you have a problem ...... 26, 288 and Accessories ...... 26, 133 Handbrake...... 23, 24, 223 Ignition logic ...... 51, 58 Glasses compartment ...... 108 Hazard warning lights ...... 16, 132 Ignition system ...... 291, 300 Glove compartment ...... 108 Head restraints...... 28, 88, 132, 133 Immobiliser ...... 67 Glove compartment lighting...... 140 Headlight flash ...... 15 Information display...... 46 Bulb replacement...... 287 Headlight range adjustment...... 136, 268 Infotainment system ...... 65 Graphical Information Display ...... 46 Headlight switch...... 14, 134, 135 Instrument display ...... 45 Gross Vehicle Weight...... 318 Headlight wash system...... 18, 299 Instrument illumination...... 138 Headlights...... 14 Bulb replacement ...... 287 Daytime running lights...... 134 Instrument panel ...... 7 Driving abroad...... 140 Instruments ...... 36 Front fog lights ...... 135 Interactive Driving System (IDS+).. 208, 210 Reversing lights...... 135 Interior mirror...... 6 Warning device...... 23 Interruption of power supply..... 60, 63, 143 Heated exterior mirrors...... 18, 156 Easytronic...... 180 Heated front seats ...... 156 Electric windows ...... 143 Heated rear window ...... 18, 156 Selector lever lock...... 187, 195 Heating ...... 153, 158 ISO-FIX ...... 127 Seats ...... 156 With climate control system ...... 169 J With air conditioning system .....162, 166 Jack ...... 251 Height adjustment Jump leads...... 244 Seat belts...... 113 Steering wheel...... 7 High-pressure cleaners ...... 238, 304, 305 Hill Start Assist...... 223 Horn...... 16 346 Index

K M O Key Main beam...... 15, 134 Octane numbers...... 200, 308 Extending ...... 66 Bulb replacement ...... 270, 272 Oil change ...... 293 Ignition lock...... 14 Control indicator...... 40 Oil filter change...... 293 Locking doors...... 76 Maintenance...... 26, 290 Oil level and consumption...... 39, 292 Remove...... 24 Air conditioning system...... 173 Oil pressure...... 37 Starting the engine ...... 14, 22 Anti-freeze protection ...... 294 Oils...... 292 Key numbers ...... 2 Brake fluid ...... 296 Open&Start system ...... 22, 31, 36, 70 Keys ...... 66 Brakes...... 222 Operating temperature ...... 197 Catalytic converter ...... 207 Outside temperature gauge ...... 47 L Engine oil...... 292, 293 Overrun ...... 197, 199 Language selection...... 51, 56 Fuel consumption ...... 199 Lashing eyes ...... 102 Tyre pressure...... 228 P Leather trim ...... 304 Tyres ...... 229, 230 Paintwork damage...... 304 Level control system...... 216 Windscreen wiper ...... 297 Panoramic windscreen...... 34, 144 Lighting switch...... 14 Manual transmission, see Transmission . 20 Parking distance sensors ...... 214 Lighting ...... 14, 39, 134 Mirrors ...... 6, 131 Parking...... 24, 214 Driving abroad...... 140 Misted windows ...... 159, 170 Parking lights...... 14, 138 Loading ...... 239, 316, 317 Mobile telephone...... 65 Bulb replacement ...... 271, 274 Locking doors ...... 2, 76 Motorway lighting (AFL)...... 33, 137 Parts ...... 26, 133 Locking from the inside...... 78 Pedals...... 197 Locks...... 305 N Performance ...... 313 Lubricants ...... 292, 307 Neutral, transmission ...... 20 Petrol ...... 200, 308, 309 Luggage compartment...... 81 Number plate lights Pinking...... 200 Bulb replacement...... 287 Bulb replacement ...... 285 Pollen filter ...... 173 FlexOrganizer...... 101 Number plate lighting...... 285 Power assisted steering, see electro-hy- Lighting ...... 140 Number plates...... 301 draulic power assisted steering...... 196 Loading ...... 104, 239, 318 Power steering, see electro-hydraulic pow- Locking ...... 81 er assisted steering ...... 196 Safety net ...... 99 Preheating ...... 22, 42 Luggage compartment cover ...... 97, 98 Preheating switch...... 22 Lumbar support...... 4 Puddle light...... 140 Pushing, towing...... 243 Index 347

Sport programme...... 32, 210 Q S Starter switch...... 14 Quickheat...... 158, 165, 169 Safeguard against Starting the engine ...... 14, 67, 174, 243 unauthorised use...... 2, 14, 25 Self-help ...... 243 R Safety accessories ...... 128, 133, 248 Steam-jet cleaners ...... 238, 304, 305 Radio ...... 64 Safety net...... 99 Steering column lock...... 14, 24 Radio equipment (CB)...... 65 Safety systems...... 109 Steering wheel adjustment...... 7 Radio reception ...... 64 Saving energy...... 198 Steering wheel remote control ...... 30, 64 Radio frequency remote control Seat adjustment ...... 3 Stowage compartments ...... 108 Central locking system ...... 2, 31, 68, 71 Seat belts ...... 110, 113, 304 Sunroof...... 144 Rain sensor...... 17, 297 Seat height adjustment ...... 4 Sunvisors ...... 34, 140, 144 Reading lights...... 139 Seating position...... 87 Sunblind ...... 145 Rear light cluster...... 134 Seat occupancy recognition...... 122 System settings...... 50, 55 Bulb replacement...... 276, 282 Seats...... 3, 4 Rear window wash system...... 18, 299, 303 Heated seats...... 156 Refuelling...... 201 Selector lever...... 175, 183, 189 Fuel filler cap...... 202 Selector lever lock...... 20, 21, 183, 189 Remote control Self-diagnosis ...... 112, 121, 225 Central locking system ...... 2, 31, 68, 71 Self-help ...... 243 Steering wheel...... 30, 64 Automatic transmission ...... 187 Replacement keys ...... 66 Electric sunroof ...... 145 Reversing lights Electric windows...... 143 Bulb replacement...... 276, 282 Information display ...... 48 Rollover protection system ...... 151 Radio frequency remote control ... 69, 75 Roof lining ...... 34, 144 Service interval display ...... 290 Roof load...... 105, 196, 199, 316, 317 Service work ...... 26, 44, 290 Roof racks ...... 199, 234, 318 Side airbags...... 118 Run-flat tyres ...... 231 Signal system...... 15, 16 Running-in...... 196 Spare keys...... 66 Brakes ...... 222 Spare wheel ...... 249, 250, 252 Speed...... 198, 199 Fuel consumption ...... 198, 199 Speedometer ...... 45 Sport mode ...... 39 348 Index

Transmission, Easytronic ...... 174 T Driving programmes ...... 176 U Tables ...... 108 Fault...... 180 Units of measure ...... 51, 57 Tachometer...... 45 Interruption of power supply ...... 180 Unleaded fuel...... 200, 203, 308 Tail lights ...... 134 Kickdown...... 178 Used oil ...... 293 Bulb replacement...... 276, 282 Selector lever...... 20, 175 Tailgate ...... 81 Winter programme ...... 177 V Tank Transmission, manual...... 20 Valve cap key ...... 228, 326 Fuel gauge ...... 45 Tread depth...... 230 Vauxhall alarm system ...... 83 Technical data...... 306 Trip computer ...... 30, 52, 58 Vehicle care ...... 302 Telephone, see Mobile telephone ...... 65 Trip odometer...... 44, 45 Vehicle decommissioning ...... 301 Temperature regulation...... 157, 169 Triple Information Display ...... 46 Vehicle Identification Number ...... 307 Tempomat, see cruise control ...... 212 TSA (Trailer Stability Assist)...... 240 Vehicle keys, see Keys ...... 66 Temporary spare wheel ...... 233, 250 Turn signal lights ...... 15 Vehicle recommissioning ...... 301 The first 600 miles...... 196 Bulb replacement ...... 275, 276, 282 Vehicle tools ...... 251 Tightening torque...... 255, 326 Twin Audio...... 31, 64 Ventilation ...... 153, 158, 165, 171 Time ...... 48, 51 TwinTop ...... 146 Tools ...... 251 Closing the roof ...... 147 Towing...... 245 Opening the roof ...... 147 Towing equipment ...... 235 Rollover protection ...... 151 Towing eye...... 245, 247 Warning buzzers...... 148 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA)...... 240 Wind deflector ...... 149 Transmission display ...... 43, 174, 182, 189 Tyre chains...... 232, 326 Transmission, automatic... 20, 21, 182, 188 Tyre condition...... 229 Automatic mode...... 183, 189 Tyre pressure ...... 32, 218, 228, 326 Driving programme ...... 184, 191 Tyre pressure monitoring system ...... 218 Fault...... 186, 194 Tyre repair kit ...... 256 Interruption of power supply .....187, 195 Kickdown ...... 185, 192 Selector lever...... 20, 183, 189, 190 Selector lever lock ...... 20 Winter programme ...... 185, 192 Index 349

W X Warning buzzers...... 23 Xenon headlight system ...... 272 Warning messages ...... 49, 54, 55 Bulb replacement ...... 272 Warning triangle...... 133, 248 Driving abroad...... 140 Wash fluid reservoir, windscreen wash system...... 299 Weights...... 316, 317 Wheels, tyres ...... 226 Wind deflector ...... 149 Windows Demisting and defrosting ...... 159, 162, 166, 170 Windscreen wash system ...... 18 Anti-freeze protection ...... 299 Capacities...... 336, 337 Wash fluid reservoir...... 299 Windscreen wiper ...... 17, 297 Winter mode Starting-off aid ...... 177 Winter operation Battery ...... 197 Coolant, anti-freeze...... 294 Fuel consumption ...... 199 Fuel for diesel engines...... 201 Heating...... 153, 162, 166 Locks...... 305 Tyre chains ...... 232, 326 Window demisting and defrosting....159 Windscreen wash system, anti-freeze protection...... 299 Winter programme ...... 177, 185, 192 Winter tyres ...... 232, 326 Owner’s Manual Owner’s and Maintenance Safety Operation, ASTRA

ASTRA TS 1612-B-06 ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. Ltd., ©Copyright Motors Vauxhall by or Reproduction or in whole translation, in parts, is not withoutpermitted prior consent written Motors Vauxhall from Ltd. under rights as understood All the copyright explicitly are laws Ltd. Motors Vauxhall reserved by and specifications contained in this illustrations information, All based on the latest are manual information production atavailable the time of publication. The right changes at make is reserved to time without any notice. JanuaryEdition: 2006.